Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 Version 1 4 (2)

Networks

Version Number

Issue Date

Version 1.4

4 May 2010

License Grant. Artefact Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd hereby grants Western Power a non-exclusive, non-transferable right to use one copy of this version of the Western Power Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 Version 1.4 - Issue Date 4 May 2010. You may install one copy of the CD on one computer / workstation for which the CD was designed. The CD and documentation are protected by copyright law and remain the intellectual property of Artefact Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. Artefact Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. is not responsible for any damage to the user's computer system or data and in no event will Artefact Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd., its officers, directors, employees or agents be responsible to the user for any consequential, incidental, or indirect damages (including damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information and the like) arising out of the use or inability to use the Artefact Systems (Australia) Pty Ltd. CD.

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 WORK PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS Date Issued: 4 May 2010

The following information is the 'Western Power Work Procedure Instructions' for the use of this Network Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 Please refer to the How To Use This Manual template for further details on how to use this Network Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 This Document Is Uncontrolled When Printed

Western Power Network Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1 The responsibility onsibility for safe working with electrical switchgear rests with th the employer, employees, and contractors required to operate the different types of switchgear that exists on the Western Power network. The purpose of this manual is to provide a common set of operating instructions for electrical switchgear. The intent is to provide a consistent understanding of switchgear operating requirements and promote the safe and efficient operation of switchgear. This can reduce the likelihood of personal injury, equipment damage and loss of supply. This manual is a physical operating guide only, and does not contain all of the technical details, system protection requirements, and operational checks that are required for safe operation of the network. This manual must be used in conjunction with the Western Power's Electrical Safety Code, Switching Operators Manuals, Network Operating Instructions, Field Instructions, the Job Risk Assessment process - and remember to Switch On Mate . When access or switching is required on the electrical network for ANY PURPOSE the Control Centre MUST be advised prior to the operation starting, and at the completion of the operation. Persons operating the equipment contained in this Manual must be appropriately trained and authorised by Western Power as per NOI 04-13. They should also ensure operating equipment is in good order and wear and use the correct protective apparel.

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 WORK PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS

Doc Ref: WPWorkProcedure1

Attention

It is the switching operators responsibility to operate only within their authorised levels. The equipment covered in this Manual is not exhaustive and there are items of equipment that have not yet been included. Whilst every effort has been made to ensure accuracy all users are encouraged to report any errors inaccuracies or omissions found while using the manual as a guide. If an amendment is required on an item of equipment or a new template is required for equipment not yet contained in this manual, contact your representative on the Operations Policy and Practices Committee or the Manager Network Operations - Network Operations Control Centre. Arrangements will be made for the photography and text to be compiled to enable new templates to be made and distributed. This manual is a controlled document. When there are modifications or additions to this manual the modified or new templates will be replaced and a new index issued and dated accordingly.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 WORK PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 WORK PROCEDURE INSTRUCTIONS Date Issued: 4 May 2010

This Document Is Uncontrolled When Printed

SWITCHING AUTHORITIES AND COMPETENCY (Ref NOI 04-13) Switching Level

Levels Include

1

All LV O/H systems including Distribution HV from drop-outs to transformers

2

All O/H apparatus including Reclosers, Sectionalisers, Regulators,

3

Distribution HV O/H to U/G systems (ie. aerial to RMU )

4

LV underground systems

5

Distribution HV underground RMU to RMU

6

Operation of Distribution HV feeders from Zone Substations including

Capacitors and Ground mounted transformers.

protection by-pass, transformer paralleling and transfer bus. 7

Transmission circuits from Zone Substations.

8

All apparatus within a Zone Substation.

9

Transmission circuits into Zone Substations.

10

All Terminal Substation apparatus.

11

Control Room operations including switching schedule preparation (NOCC).

12

Control Room operations including switching schedule preparation (SOCC).

This Document Is Uncontrolled When Printed

AUTHORITY RESTRICTIONS 'A3' 'D'

DX & N, Combination of restrictions Under Direction

'DN'

Under Direct, EXCL Comm of RMU

'DX'

Under Direct, EXCL Earthing

'R'

Excludes switching on Regulators

'N'

Excludes Commissioning of Ring Main Switchgear

'NX'

2 of 2

Doc Ref: WPWorkProcedure2

Excludes Earthing & Comm of RMU

'S'

Excludes writing and checking of switching programs

'X'

Excludes Earthing

'Z'

Authority Suspended

'G'

Gas Insulated Transmission Switchgear

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Date Issued: 4 May 2010

The following is a general guide for the use of this manual. For company specific instructions please refer to the introductory pages. Page 1 of this guide template shows how to interpret data on 'Page 1' of all templates in this manual. Please turn over for a guide on interpreting data on 'Pages 2, 3 and 4' of templates in this manual. Symbols Colour / Reference Yes No Note

Operating Instruction Colour Reference

Main Picture

C 2 Grid Reference

Company logo. Identifies the manual issuing company.

Document reference name. Quote this for updates etc.

Closing

No

Opening Earthing Isolate / Misc Switchgear details. Rating is maximum current load rating. If text is red then rating is maximum load breaking capacity.

Switchgear name. Templates are sorted in alphabetical order.

Main switchgear picture reference grid. Refer to grid co-ordinates in top left corner of operating instruction pictures.

Operating option icons. Use these as a quick visual reference for operating function options on this switchgear.

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom FBX 630 Amps 16 KA SF6

Special Notes Caution

Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch.

Page number icon. Indicates the total number of pages used for the switchgear information.

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operating instruction. Step numbers correspond with coloured arrows in the adjacent photograph.

1

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

C2 E2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Special notes pertinent to the particular operating instruction

1

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

F2

2 2

1 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to charge the operating spring then CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Operating instruction arrows. Numbers correspond with step numbers in adjacent operating instructions. Arrows are colour coded for the particular operation.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Red arrows Indicate nominal operating voltage (KV) or LV where specifically indicated.

Switchgear photograph. May be one shot or a montage showing switchgear options.

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Date issued. Indicates issuing date for switchgear template. This must be the same as listed in the manual index.

Switchgear name in large type for quick referencing.

Operation Options Opening Closing Earthing HV Fuses Spring Charge

C2 E2

Misc

Circuit Breakers

ALSTOM FBX

Western Power document reference number.

LV

Underground

Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Main photograph grid reference. This refers to the section of the main photograph shown in operating instruction.

Overhead

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBX1

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Switchgear operating options. Red arrows indicate functions available.

Operating instruction photographs. In most cases the photograph will show apparatus as you would find it prior to performing the operation.

Switchgear Category Colour Reference

ALSTOM FBX

Special notes. General precautions / instructions pertinent to switchgear type.

Quick reference legend for mandatory operational checks prior to operation

Caution

Yes

Switchgear category colour for quick referencing. 1 of 2

Operating instruction headings. Headings are colour coded for the particular operating instruction.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Doc Ref: WPManualInstructions1

Page number within switchgear category colour.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPManualInstructions2

Page 2 of this guide template shows how to interpret data on 'Pages 2, 3 and 4' of templates in this manual. In the majority of cases a complete switchgear template will consist of two pages only. If more than two pages are required for a particular switchgear item the total page number will be indicated in the top right hand corner of 'Page 1' of the relevant switchgear template. If a switchgear item has only one page of instructions the reverse side of the template will not have a page reference and will only show the switchgear item name and operation icons. The words 'This page is deliberately left blank' will be printed in the centre of the page. Symbols Colour / Reference

Operating Instruction Colour Reference

Yes No Note

Yes

Closing

No

Opening Earthing Isolate / Misc

Main Picture

C 2 Grid Reference

Date issued. Indicates issuing date for switchgear template. This must be the same as listed in the manual index.

Main photograph grid reference. This refers to section of main photograph shown in operating instruction.

Page number icon. Indicates the total number of pages used for the switchgear information. If the template has only one page nothing will appear here.

Switchgear name in large type for quick referencing.

LV

Underground

Document reference name. Quote this for for updates etc.

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBX2

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

F2

2

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Earth Switch Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. Test 'Safe to Earth' with the neon indicator as shown. Slide the earth switch interlock lever to the right and: Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

4 C2 D2 F2

3

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

1

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

3 2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F4

5

5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Switchgear category colour for quick referencing.

Switchgear name. Templates are sorted in alphabetical order.

Operating instruction headings. Headings are colour coded for the particular operating instruction.

Special notes pertinent to the particular operating instruction

Operating instruction. Step numbers correspond with coloured arrows in adjacent photograph.

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

5. Grasp the end cap tabs as shown and withdraw the required HV fuse. 6. Replace the required HV fuse(s) with the striker pin(s) facing towards the access cover. 7. Raise the HV fuse access panel. 8. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate CW. Remove the key.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Circuit Breakers

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Confirm the HV fuse operation via the red mechanical indicator as shown. 3. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate ACW. Remove the key. 4. Raise the HV fuse access panel interlock and lower the HV fuse access panel.

4

Misc

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. 2. 3. 4.

5

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW marginally to the stop position to open the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

F2 F4

2 of 2

Operating option icons. Use these as a quick visual reference for operating function options on this switchgear.

Overhead

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

C2 D2 F2

Operating instruction photographs. In most cases the photograph will show apparatus as you would find it prior to performing the operation.

Page number within switchgear category colour. If template has only one page nothing will appear here.

Switchgear Category Colour Reference

Caution

ALSTOM FBX

ALSTOM FBX

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Ensure the HV fuse striker pin is located in the top mounting assembly. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Western Power document reference number.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 SYMBOL LEGEND Date Issued: 4 May 2010

The following information is the Symbol Legend for the Western Power Network Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 . Please refer to the How To Use This Manual template for further details on how to use this Network Switchgear Instruction Manual 1 . This Document Is Uncontrolled When Printed

SYMBOL LEGEND A Access Cover - Bolted

HV fuses

L Local Manual Operating Handle Open

Rackable VT R

Air Operated A

HV Stick - Earthing

Local Manual Operating Handle Open / Close

Racking In / Out R

Arc Fault Protection A

HV Stick - Close

Local Manual Push Button Close

Racking Trolley - CB

Assembly Required

HV Stick - Open

Local Manual Push Button Open

Relay / Meter Analog

Auto Reclose A

HV Stick - Open / Close

Local Manual Push Button Open / Close

Relay / Meter Digital

Closed

Hydraulic Pump

Lock and Tag

Relay Targets - Flag LED

Differential Protection D

Interlock Key

Manual Open / Close

Remote Electrical Close

Directional Protection

Isolation

Manual Close

Remote Electrical Open

Distance Protection

Latching

Manual Open

Remote Electrical Open / Close

Earth Fault Protection

LV De-ion / Fuse

Not Applicable Do Not Operate

Shutters

Earthing - Manual Applied

LV Fuse

Oil Level Gauge

Solenoid Operated

Earthing Via CB / Switch

LV Links

Open O

Spring Charge

Fault Indicators

Local Electrical Close

Overcurrent Protection

Tap Changer Automatic A

Gas / Oil Pressure Gauge

Local Electrical Open

Padlock Close

Tap Changer T Manual M

H Hand Operated Close

Local Electrical Close / open

Padlock Open

Test Probes

Hand Operated Open

Local Manual Operating L Handle - Earthing H

Pilot Wire Protection P

Two Man operation T

H Hand Operated C Close / Open

Local Manual Operating Handle Close

Plug Box - CB

Viewing Ports

Linked Templates

Visual Confirmation

CW Clockwise ACW Anti-clockwise

Page 1 0f 1

Page 1 0f 2

Page 1 0f 3

Page 1 0f 4

Page 2 0f 2

Page 2 0f 3

Page 2 0f 4

Page 3 0f 3

Page 3 0f 4 Page 4 0f 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 SYMBOL LEGEND

Doc Ref: WPSymbolLegend1

Magnified Image

Instruction Continued

Instruction Continued From Previous Page

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 SYMBOL LEGEND

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 SYMBOL LEGEND Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPSymbolLegend2

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - VERSION 1.4 Date Issued: 4 May 2010

The following is an index of all switchgear templates in this manual. Please note: The Date Issued data on each switchgear template must be the same as in this index. Any additions or reissue of current switchgear templates will be accompanied with a new index template. Templates are listed alphabetically. Please ensure all templates in the manual, including new and reissued, are sorted alphabetically. Denotes new templates issued with this Index - Version 1.4

Switchgear Type

Date Issued

Underground Switchgear Alstom FBA5 (2 Templates) Alstom FBX Alstom Fluokit M Alstom Fluokit M C10M Motorised Isolator English Electric OLX Felten & Guilleaume GA2K GEC DDFA Hazemeyer Magnefix MD (2 Templates) Holec SVS (2 Templates) Long & Crawford ETV3/2 Long & Crawford T4GF3 (2 Templates) Long & Crawford Type GF3 & J4 Long & Crawford Type J Long & Crawford Type J3 Long & Crawford Type R3 Merlin Gerin RM6 Ring Main Isolator - Type 1 Merlin Gerin RM6 Ring Main Isolator - Type 2 Merlin Gerin / Schneider SM6 (2 Templates) Merlin Gerin / Schneider SM6 Circuit Breaker Merlin Gerin Vercors M6 Nebb Brown Boveri RGB12 S & C SML 20 Fuse Element S & C SML 20 Ground Mounted Fuse (2 Templates) Schneider D14 Circuit Switch Siemens 8CK2 Western Power Mechanical Actuator

2 March 2006 2 March 2006 4 May 2010 4 May 2010 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 27 August 2007 27 August 2007 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006

Overhead Switchgear ABB NWI-58 Pole Top Capacitor ALM Air Break Switch Falcon Air Break Switch Falcon - Ezybreak Air Break Switch Haycolec Sectionaliser Type 01-04 HV Drop-out (HVDO) Fuses McGraw Edison RV ACR Nulec N24-150 Auto Circuit Recloser Nulec RL Load Break Switch / Sectionaliser Nulec U27 ACR Nulec W Series Single Phase Auto Circuit Recloser Reyrolle OYT Recloser S & C Fault Tamer (2 Templates) S & C SMD20 Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses Stanger In Line Links

17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 27 August 2007 17 February 2009 2 March 2006 27 August 2007 27 August 2007 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 27 August 2007 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 27 August 2007

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - VERSION 1.4

Doc Ref: WPIndexV141

Circuit Breakers ABB Unigear ZS1 Capacitor Circuit Interlock ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch ABB Unigear ZS1 Transformer Switch / Earth Switch / HV Fuses ABB Unigear ZS1 VT Alstom GL 107 Circuit Breaker Alstom HWX Busbar Earth Switch Alstom HWX Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) Alstom HWX VT Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - VERSION 1.4

NETWORK SWITCHGEAR INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1 DISTRIBUTION - VERSION 1.4 Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPIndexV142

Switchgear Type

Date Issued

ASEA HLC 63-52/1250 Circuit Breaker Email J18 Solenoid CB Email J22 Solenoid CB English Electric OKW3 Circuit Breaker GEC Alsthom SBV 24 Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) GEC Alsthom SBV 24 Earth Truck (2 Templates) GEC D4XD Circuit Breaker GEC OX36 Circuit Breaker Inoue Denki 30TE0150RS Circuit Breaker Magrini Galileo 38 MGE 1000 BM Circuit Breaker Magrini Galileo 38 MGE 1000 BM20 Circuit Breaker Magrini Scarpa E Magnano MMS24C Circuit Breaker Nilsen AEI JB422/OMI Retrofit Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) Nilsen GEC OLX Retrofit Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 1 Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 2 Reyrolle 2A9T/X1/MO Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) Reyrolle D16 GFC H VT Reyrolle LMVP X5B / X8 Circuit Breaker (2 Templates) Reyrolle LMVP X5B / X8 CB Earthing Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 CB (2 Templates) Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Earth Switch Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 VT Western Power CB Earth Switch - Generic (2 Templates) Westinghouse (Siemens) Retrofit J18 CB Yorkshire YSF6 Circuit Breaker (2 Templates)

2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 2 March 2006 4 May 2010 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 27 August 2007 27 August 2007 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 9 November 2006 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 2 March 2006 2 March 2006 2 March 2006

Miscellaneous Equipment Alarm and Fault Relay Flags - Distribution System Equipment Label Reading (2 Templates) Horstmann Alpha E Fault Indicator Horstmann Fluid Type Fault Indicator HV - LV Fuse Rating Tables Kyle Form 4C Electronic Recloser Control Nulec CAPM2 Electronic Recloser Control (2 Templates) Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control (2 Templates) Nulec Electronic Control Box Operation Flow Chart SEL 351 Protection Relay

9 November 2006 4 May 2010 17 February 2009 9 November 2006 4 May 2010 2 March 2006 17 February 2009 17 February 2009 9 November 2006 9 November 2006

Voltage Regulators GEC VR-1 Voltage Regulator Control

17 February 2009

Low Voltage Switchgear ABB SLBM / BSL 3 Phase Gang Isolator Nilsen AB5 / 200 Circuit Breaker Nilsen NAB1 / 20 Circuit Breaker

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

27 August 2007 2 March 2006 2 March 2006

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FBA5 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom FBA5 630 Amps 16 KA SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch. Note: The earth switch operating handle is different to the circuit switch operating handle. Note: This switchgear can have both a local manual and electrical operation option. Confirm the mechanism type prior to operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation.

ALSTOM FBA5

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBA51

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

D3

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Status Indicators

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

D3

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

1

2

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

F3

1 2 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to charge the operating spring then CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

ALSTOM FBA5

ALSTOM FBA5 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBA52

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

F3

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW marginally to the stop position to open the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

1 2

B1

43 1 2

2

Operation Opening the Remote Circuit Switch - Manually

B2

1. Switch the '24 VOLT DC SUPPLY FOR CONTROL' off. 2. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW until the circuit switch opens. 4. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 5. If required switch the '24 VOLT DC SUPPLY FOR CONTROL' on.

3 2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C3 E3 G3

5 2

4

2 of 3

1. Confirm the '24 VOLT DC SUPPLY FOR CONTROL' switch is on. 2. Plug in the remote operation control switch as shown and stand away from the RMU. 3. Rotate the switch CW to the 'ON' position to close the circuit switch. 4. Rotate the switch ACW to the 'OFF' position to open the circuit switch. 5. If required unplug the remote operation control switch.

1. Switch the '24 VOLT DC SUPPLY FOR CONTROL' off. 2. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW until the circuit switch closes. 4. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 5. If required switch the '24 VOLT DC SUPPLY FOR CONTROL' on.

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Local Elec.

Operation Closing the Remote Circuit Switch - Manually

B2

3

Special Notes Caution

1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. Test 'Safe to Earth' with the neon indicator as shown. Slide the earth switch interlock lever to the left and: Unlock if required and insert the earth switch operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. At the completion of the electrical operation confirm the circuit switch status via the mechanical indicator.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. At the completion of the operation confirm the circuit switch status via the mechanical indicator.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. At the completion of the operation confirm the circuit switch status via the mechanical indicator.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FBA5 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

C3 E3 G3

2

1

1. Unlock if required and insert the earth switch operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 3. Remove the earth switch operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F7 G5

3 2

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Confirm the HV fuse operation via the red indicator as shown. 3. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate ACW. Remove the key. 4. Remove the HV fuse access panel.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F5

4

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

5. Grasp the end cap tabs as shown and withdraw the required HV fuse. 6. Replace the required HV fuse(s) with the striker pin(s) facing towards the access panel. 7. Replace the HV fuse access panel. 8. Insert the supplied HV fuse access cover latch key and rotate CW. Remove the key.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

ALSTOM FBA5

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBA53

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV fuse striker pin is located in the top mounting assembly. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

ALSTOM FBA5

ALSTOM FBA5 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBA54

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FBX Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom FBX 630 Amps 16 KA SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch.

ALSTOM FBX

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBX1

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

C2 E2

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Status Indicators

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

C2 E2

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

F2

2 2

1 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to charge the operating spring then CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ALSTOM FBX

ALSTOM FBX Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFBX2

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

F2

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW marginally to the stop position to open the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

2

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C2 D2 F2

5

2

4

3

1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. Test 'Safe to Earth' with the neon indicator as shown. Slide the earth switch interlock lever to the right and: Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

C2 D2 F2

1

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F2 F4

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Confirm the HV fuse operation via the red mechanical indicator as shown. 3. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate ACW. Remove the key. 4. Raise the HV fuse access panel interlock and lower the HV fuse access panel.

4

3 2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F4

5. Grasp the end cap tabs as shown and withdraw the required HV fuse. 6. Replace the required HV fuse(s) with the striker pin(s) facing towards the access cover. 7. Raise the HV fuse access panel. 8. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate CW. Remove the key.

5

5

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV fuse striker pin is located in the top mounting assembly. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom Fluokit M 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch. The main picture shows a transformer fuse switch. Note: There is a motorised version of this switchgear. Refer to the ALSTOM FLUOKIT M C10M MOTORISED ISOLATOR template in this manual if required.

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFluokitM1

Operation Options Opening Closing Spring Charge

Earthing HV Fuses

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

1

D4

2

Gas Pressure

1 3

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

2

1

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

3

1. Unlock if required and slide out the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch then rotate the handle CW to charge the tripping mechanism spring. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

2

3

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and slide out the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

1. Unlock if required and slide out the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

D4 F4

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

3

D4

Oil Levels

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFluokitM2

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

F2

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Slide out the operating mechanism interlock bar as shown. 2. Raise the trip lever to open the transformer fuse switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

2 F4

4

Operation Closing the HV Earth Switch 1. 2. 3. 4.

Slide out the operating mechanism interlock bar. Confirm the relevant HV switch is open. Perform a 'Safe To Earth' test using the neon indicators. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

5

Special Notes Caution Confirm the HV earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

1 F4

4

Operation Opening the HV Earth Switch

3

3

3 2

1. Slide out the operating mechanism interlock bar. 2. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 3. Shift the earth switch interlock lever to the right (as shown) and gently rotate the operating handle ACW to the first stop position. Release the interlock lever. 4. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the HV earth switch. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

D8

2

1. Confirm the relevant HV transformer HV earth switch is closed. 2. Rotate the HV fuse access cover handle ACW and remove the access cover.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the HV earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution HV fuse striker pins must be located on the top of the HV fuse. Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M C10M MOTORISED ISOLATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom Fluokit M C10m Motorised Isolator 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: For operation of the earth switch and access to the HV fuses refer to the ALSTOM FLUOKIT M template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening / Closing - Remote Opening / Closing - Local Electrical Opening / Closing - Manual Earth Switch Opening / Closing - Manual Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Local Elec.

N/A

1. Rotate the 'LOCAL REMOTE' switch on the RTU ACW to the 'LOCAL' position.

1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

3

F2 E4

3

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Local Elec. 2. Confirm the 'ISOLATION SWITCH' on the panel directly above the switch unit is in the 'I' (on) position as shown. 3. Confirm the key locking switch on the switchgear panel is in the 'I' (on) position as shown.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

2 4 7

G3

6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Local Elec.

Special Notes Caution

4. Plug the remote operating switch control cable connector into the socket on the panel directly above the switch unit as shown. 5. With the operating switch in hand move a safe distance from the switch unit. To Close: 6. Rotate the remote operating switch CW to the 'ON' position and release to close the switch. 7. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

Confirm the remote operating switch is in the neutral (vertical) position before plugging the control cable into the socket.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M C10M MOTORISED ISOLATOR

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFluokitMC10m1

1 of 2

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M C10M MOTORISED ISOLATOR

ALSTOM FLUOKIT M C10M MOTORISED ISOLATOR Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Local Elec.

10 9

G3

To Open: 8. Rotate the remote operating switch ACW to the 'OFF' position and release to open the switch. 9. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 10. At the completion of the operation remove the remote operating switch cable connector from the socket. 11. Rotate the 'LOCAL REMOTE' switch on the RTU CW to the 'REMOTE' position.

8

2

C6

4

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Manually 4. Rotate the manual control knob on the switchgear panel ACW until the notches align with the black indicators. 5. Unlock and remove the padlock then slide out the operating mechanism interlock bar.

4

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

1. Rotate the 'LOCAL REMOTE' switch on the RTU ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'ISOLATION SWITCH' on the panel directly above the switch unit ACW to the 'O' (off) position. 3. Rotate the key locking switch on the switchgear panel CW to the 'O' (off) position.

3

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Manually

F2 E4

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

5

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Manually

C6

8

9 13

To Close: 6. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 7. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to close the switch. 8. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows To Open: 9. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to open the switch.

7

6

C6

2 of 2

Doc Ref: WPAlstomFluokitMC10m2

13

11

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Switch - Manually 10. Remove the operating handle. 11. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 12. Replace the operating mechanism interlock bar and padlock. 13. Rotate the manual control knob on the switchgear panel CW until the notches are clear of the black indicators. 14. Rotate the key locking switch CW to the 'O' (on) position. 15. Rotate the 'ISOLATION SWITCH' CW to the 'I' (on) position. 16. Rotate the 'LOCAL REMOTE' switch on the RTU CW to the 'REMOTE' position.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OLX Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

English Electric OLX 800 Amps 800 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: This switchgear is not spring assisted. All operations must be done in a firm and continuous motion to the stop position.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose Test Probes O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

G2 G3

2 1

2

3

G6 F7

2

1 3

C2

4

2

Oil Levels

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and rotate the circuit interlock ACW. 2. Withdraw the circuit interlock pin. 3. Move the operating handle CW in a firm and continuous motion to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 4. Confirm the operating handle aligns with the 'ON' indicator. 5. Push in the circuit interlock pin. 6. Rotate the circuit interlock CW and lock if required.

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. The operation is not spring assisted. Move the operating handle in a firm and continuous motion.

Operation Opening the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and rotate the circuit interlock ACW. 2. Withdraw the circuit interlock pin. 3. Move the operating handle ACW in a firm and continuous motion to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 4. Confirm the operating handle aligns with the 'OFF' indicator. 5. Push in the circuit interlock pin. 6. Rotate the circuit interlock CW and lock if required.

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Earth Switch 1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Confirm the circuit interlock is rotated CW to the stop position as shown. Lock if required. 3. Unlock if required and rotate the earth interlock CW. 4. Withdraw the earth interlock pin.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OLX

Doc Ref: WPEnglishElectricOLX1

The operation is not spring assisted. Move the operating handle in a firm and continuous motion.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the earth switch. The operation is not spring assisted. Move the operating handle in a firm and continuous motion. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OLX

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OLX Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPEnglishElectricOLX2

C2

Operation Closing the Circuit Earth Switch

6

5. Move the operating handle ACW in a firm and continuous motion to the stop position to close the earth switch. 6. Push in the earth interlock pin. 7. Rotate the earth interlock ACW and lock if required.

7

5

Operation Opening the Circuit Earth Switch

C2

2

1 3

Operation Access to the Test Probes

A7 E7

2

2

4

4

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Insert the appropriate probes to the stop position. Open the circuit earth switch. Perform tests as required. Close the circuit earth switch. Withdraw the probes. Close the access cover. Tighten the two (2) access cover retaining bolts.

Operation Checking the Switchgear Oil Level

N/A

1

2 of 2

1. Confirm the relevant circuit earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the two (2) access cover retaining bolts. 3. Lower the access cover.

Operation Access to the Test Probes

A7 E7

4

1. Unlock if required and rotate the earth interlock CW. 2. Withdraw the earth interlock pin. 3. Move the operating handle CW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 4. Confirm the operating handle aligns with the 'OFF' indicator. 5. Push in the earth interlock pin. 6. Rotate the circuit interlock ACW and lock if required.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Unscrew the oil level dipstick at the rear of the switchgear unit to confirm correct oil levels. At the completion of the check ensure the dipstick is screwed home correctly.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the earth switch. The operation is not spring assisted. Move the operating handle in a firm and continuous motion.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Note: The oil level dipstick must be screwed home prior to checking oil levels.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

FELTEN & GUILLEAUME GA2K Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Felten & Guilleaume GA2K 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

C2 D2

2

1. Open the circuit switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 3. Push in and rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

3

C2 D2

Oil Levels

2

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch 3

1. Open the circuit switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 3. Push in and rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

F2

2 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

FELTEN & GUILLEAUME GA2K

Doc Ref: WPF&GGA2K1

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the transformer fuse switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 3. Push in and rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position then CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch. Remove the handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

FELTEN & GUILLEAUME GA2K

FELTEN & GUILLEAUME GA2K Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPF&GGA2K2

F2

2

1. Open the transformer fuse switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 3. Push in and rotate the operating handle ACW marginally to the stop position to open the transformer fuse switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

3

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

B2 D2 F2

3 4

1. Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and open the earth switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 3. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 4. Push in and rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

B2 D2 F2

2 3

1. Unlock if required and open the earth switch open / close operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Push in and rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

F3

3

2

F3

8

5

2 of 2

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Insert the supplied HV fuse access cover latch key and rotate ACW. Raise and remove the HV fuse access cover. 3. Raise the retaining bale of the HV fuse(s) to be replaced. 4. Withdraw the HV fuse top mounting assembly.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses 5. Remove the required HV fuse from the lower mounting assembly. 6. Replace the required HV fuse(s) with the striker pin(s) pointing to the top. 7. Clean and lubricate all contact fittings prior to restoration of the HV fuse mounting assemblies. 8. Lower the HV fuse retaining bale. 9. Replace the HV fuse access cover and latch using the supplied latch key.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV fuse striker pin is located in the top mounting assembly. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC DDFA Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GEC DDFA 400 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after any operation.

GEC DDFA

Doc Ref: WPGECDDFA1

Note: The rotation direction of the operating handle for the required function - open / close - will depend on the switch location on the switchgear unit. Confirm the required direction before operating. Note: Placing the 'FUSE ISOLATOR' in the 'ISOLATED' position earths the HV fuses.

Operation Options Opening Closing Spring Charge

Earthing Test Probes HV Fuses

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

B2 F2 G2

2

3

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

F2 G2

2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Confirm the rotating interlock selector is in the circuit switch position as shown. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle in the required direction to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'OFF'.

1

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

D2

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the rotating interlock selector is in the circuit switch position as shown. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle in the required direction to the stop position to close the circuit / transformer fuse switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'ON'.

1

3

Oil Levels

Special Notes Caution

1. Push the 'TRIP' lever to the left to open the transformer fuse switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'OFF'.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

GEC DDFA

GEC DDFA Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPGECDDFA2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

B2 F2 G2

3

1. Confirm the relevant circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the interlock selector to the earth position as shown. 3. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle in the required direction to the stop position to close the earth switch. 5. Remove the operating handle.

2 4

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

B2 F2 G2

6. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'EARTH' 7. If required rotate the interlock and lock in the 'Earth Switch On' position as shown.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'EARTH' at the completion of the operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

7

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

B2 F2 G2

2

3

1

D2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

5

3

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Confirm the HV fuse operation via the red target indicator as shown. 3. Insert the operating handle into the Fuse Isolator mechanism as shown and rotate CW to the 'ISOLATED' position. The HV fuses are now earthed. 4. Raise the HV fuse access panel. Remove and replace the relevant HV fuse. Close the access panel. 5. Rotate the Fuse Isolator to the 'SERVICE' position.

3

Operation Access to the Circuit Test Probes

B6

2

4 3

2 of 2

1. Unlock if required and rotate the interlock selector to the earth position as shown. 2. Insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle in the required direction to the stop position to open the earth switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. If required rotate the interlock selector to the circuit switch position. Lock if required.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation. Confirm the mechanical indicator points to 'OFF' at the completion of the operation.

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot. When replacing the HV fuse ensure the striker pin points upwards.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit / transformer fuse switch is open and the circuit / transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the circuit test probes access cover retaining bolt. 3. Lower the test probe access cover. 4. Lower the earthing bar. Perform the required tests. Note: To restore, reverse the above instructions.

When restoring the after test ensure the earthing bar is pushed home firmly to the stop position.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Hazemeyer Magnefix MD 250 / 400 Amps 400 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The three (3) phase operating handle is to be used for the closing function only.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm N/A

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Single Phase Circuit Switch Link

1

1. Attach the switch link operating handle onto the switch link as shown.

Operation Closing the Single Phase Circuit Switch Link

C2

4

2. Insert the switch link carefully in the desired position. 3. Push the switch link with a firm and continuous motion to the stop position to close the link. 4. Slide up the operating handle and remove from the switch link. 5. Repeat this operation for all three (3) phases.

3 2

C2

Operation Opening the Single Phase Circuit Switch Link

5

2 1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Attach the switch link operating handle to the required switch link as shown. 2. Grasp the operating handle and withdraw the switch link in a firm and continuous motion. 3. Remove the switch link from the operating handle and stow correctly. 4. Repeat this operation for all three (3) phases. 5. If required place switch link spout covers onto the switch link spouts as shown. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Status Indicators

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD

Doc Ref: WPHazemeyerMD1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch link location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch link location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure all three (3) phases are closed correctly.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch link location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure all three (3) phases are opened and removed correctly.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPHazemeyerMD2

Operation Closing the Three Phase Circuit Switch Link

N/A

Engage the switch link three phase operating handle by: 1. Place the operating handle in a vertical position on the ground as shown. Secure in this position by placing the foot through the handle. 2. Using both hands, raise the attachment cylinder until a 'click' is heard thereby latching the cylinder mechanism.

2

1

B4

4 5

6

5

B4

1

1

Special Notes Caution

3. Insert the three phase switch carefully into position ready to be closed. 4. Attach the operating handle to the three phase switch link with the long tongue on the LH side as shown. 5. Unlock the cylinder closing mechanism by depressing the latches as shown. 6. Push in the operating handle in a firm and continuous motion to the stop position to close the three phase switch link. Remove the operating handle.

Confirm the circuit three phase switch link location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Three Phase Circuit Switch Link

Special Notes Caution

Operation Earthing the Circuit

N/A

1. Attach the earthing handle to the earthing link as shown.

1

Confirm the circuit three phase switch link location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Three Phase Circuit Switch Link

1. Grasp the three phase switch link by the two handles as shown. 2. Withdraw the three phase switch link in a firm and continuous motion and stow correctly. 3. If required place switch link spout covers onto the switch link spouts.

2

Special Notes Caution

Confirm the circuit three phase switch link location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the earthing lead is firmly attached to the earthing link.

Operation Earthing the Circuit

F2

2

3

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

2. Place the earthing link carefully on the relevant circuit spout. 3. Grasp the earthing handle above the red limit ring and push the earthing link in to the stop position in a firm and continuous motion to earth the circuit. 4. Remove the earthing handle. 5. Repeat this operation for all three (3) phases. Note: To remove the circuit earth reverse the above instructions.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

G2

1 3

1. Confirm the transformer fuse circuit switch links have been removed. 2. If required, confirm the transformer fuse circuit is earthed via the earthing links. 3. Rotate the HV fuse interlock ACW as shown.

1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse circuit location and labeling prior to operation.

1

G2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

4

5

4. Grasp the required HV fuse extraction handle and withdraw the HV fuse. 5. Remove the HV fuse from the end cap and replace with a new HV fuse.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

A2

6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

6. Insert the HV fuse into the HV fuse chamber ensuring the end cap seats home correctly. 7. Rotate the HV fuse interlock CW to the stop position.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Special Notes Caution

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD

Doc Ref: WPHazemeyerMD3

Note: The circuit switch links cannot be replaced unless the HV fuse interlock is in the correct position - rotated CW.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD

HAZEMEYER MAGNEFIX MD Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPHazemeyerMD4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HOLEC SVS Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Holec SVS 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switch.

HOLEC SVS

Doc Ref: WPHolecSVS1

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

F2

2 1

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

F2

1

2

A2

2 1

2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch 1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the transformer fuse switch open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to charge the operating spring then CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

HOLEC SVS

HOLEC SVS Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPHolecSVS2

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

A2

1. Press the red 'O' button to open the transformer fuse switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

F2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

5

4 3 2 F2

1. Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Confirm 'Safe to Earth' with the LED indicators if fitted. 3. Unlock if required and slide the earth switch interlock lever to the right and: 4. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch selector mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to select the earthing option. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows earthed.

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

8

7. Remove the operating handle from the earth switch selector mechanism and insert into the circuit switch open / close mechanism as shown. 8. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch thereby earthing the circuit. 9. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit / earth switch status.

7

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

F2

1

1. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the circuit / earth switch open / close operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch thereby de-earthing the circuit. 3. Remove the operating handle.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth selector switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

2

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

F2

6

4. Unlock if required and slide the earth switch interlock lever to the right and: 5. Unlock if required and insert the operating handle into the earth switch selector mechanism. 6. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to de-select the earthing option. 7. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows normal circuit. 8. Remove the operating handle and lock if required.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

5

2 of 3

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HOLEC SVS Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

A2

2 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is closed with the selector switch in the earth position. 2. Slide the earth switch interlock across to the right and up. 3. Insert the supplied HV fuse access panel latch key and rotate ACW. 4. Remove the HV fuse access panel. 5. Replace HV fuses as required.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV fuse striker pin is located in the top mounting assembly. Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HOLEC SVS

Doc Ref: WPHolecSVS3

3 of 3

HOLEC SVS

HOLEC SVS Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPHolecSVS4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD ETV3/2 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford ETV3/2 200 Amps 250 MVA Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit switch is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: This switchgear does not have an earthing switch.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

F3

1

1

F3

1

1

C2

3

3

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

Operation Access to the HV Fuses 1. Confirm the relevant transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Unlock the HV fuse access lid interlock bar and remove. 3. Unscrew the two (2) HV fuse access lid retaining wing nuts and lower the retaining bolts. 4. Raise the HV fuse access lid to the stop position.

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the switch. Lock if required. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

1. Unlock if required and lower the operating handle to the stop position to open the switch. Lock if required. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Correct Latching

LONG & CRAWFORD ETV3/2

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordETV3-21

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the fused circuit is isolated prior to accessing the HV fuses. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

LONG & CRAWFORD ETV3/2

LONG & CRAWFORD ETV3/2 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordETV3-22

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford T4GF3 Ring Main Isolator 630 Amps 630 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the ring main isolator is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch and earth switch have different operating mechanisms to the circuit switches. Note: In some cases this switchgear may be fitted with a Western Power Mechanical A ctuator. Refer to the 'WESTERN POWER MECHANICAL ACTUATOR' template in this manual for further details if required.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm F8

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation

2

Configuring the Ring Main Isolator Operating Handle 1. Determine the required direction of the operating handle rotation - clockwise or anticlockwise.

A

B

2. Rotate the operating handle ratchet cam to the required position ,A or B, (as shown). The operating handle will only function in the direction of the ratchet cam.

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

D2 G2

1

D2 G2

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution The operating handle will 'spin free' if the ratchet cam is not set to the correct position.

Special Notes Caution

1. Attach the operating handle to the circuit switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Rotate the operating handle in the direction of the indicating arrow (adjacent to the operating mechanism) to the stop position to close the switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the operating handle ratchet cam is set to the correct position prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution

1. Attach the operating handle to the circuit switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Rotate the operating handle in the direction of the indicating arrow (adjacent to the operating mechanism) to the stop position to open the switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordT4GF31

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the operating handle ratchet cam is set to the correct position prior to operating.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordT4GF32

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

B4

1. Raise the transformer fuse switch operating handle a short distance to open the switch. Continue raising the operating handle to the stop (RESET) position to charge the operating spring. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

1 1

B4

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

1

1. Lower the transformer fuse switch operating handle to the stop position to close the switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Operation Closing the Circuit Earth Switch

C2 E2

3

1. Confirm the circuit switch is open. 2. Slide the earth switch interlock across to allow access to the earth switch operating mechanism. Lock if required. 3. Attach the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism. 4. Rotate the operating handle in the direction of the indicating arrow (adjacent to the earth switch operating mechanism) to the stop position to close the earth switch. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

Operation Opening the Circuit Earth Switch

C2 E2

1. Slide the earth switch interlock across to allow access to the earth switch operating mechanism. 2. Attach the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle in the direction of the indicating arrow (adjacent to the earth switch operating mechanism) to the stop position to open the earth switch. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

1

2

B2

1

2

3

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing the Transformer Earth Switch 1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the operating handle is in the fully raised (RESET) position. 2. Shift the earth switch interlock across to the right. 3. Attach the operating extension handle to the operating lever and lower the transformer earth switch operating handle to the stop position to close the earth switch. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the operating handle ratchet cam is set to the correct position prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the operating handle ratchet cam is set to the correct position prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Opening the Transformer Earth Switch

B2

2

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and the operating handle is in the fully raised (RESET) position. 2. Confirm the earth switch interlock has been moved to the right. 3. Attach the operating extension handle to the operating lever and raise the transformer earth switch operating handle to the stop position to open the earth switch. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

3

D1

5 3

3 4,7

Operation Access to the HV Fuses 1. Confirm the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Confirm the transformer fuse switch operating handle is fully raised in the 'RESET' position. 3. Unscrew the two (2) retaining bolts on the HV fuse access cover. 4. Raise the HV fuse access cover to the stop position. 5. Open the appropriate HV fuse locking levers and remove the HV fuse.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

D1

7

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

Special Notes Caution

6. Replace the HV fuse with the striker pin pointing to the rear of the ring main switch and close the locking arms. 7. Release the HV fuse access cover hinge latch and close the cover. 8. Tighten the two (2) HV fuse access cover retaining bolts.

Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordT4GF33

3 of 3

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR

LONG & CRAWFORD T4GF3 RING MAIN ISOLATOR Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordT4GF34

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE GF3 & J4 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford Type GF3 & J4 200 Amps, 630 Amps 200 Amps, 630 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The Long & Crawford Type GF3 and Type J4 switches are often found in combination with one another as shown. Apart from the earthing interlock the operation is identical for all units.

Type GF3

Type GF3

Type J4

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm C2 E2 H2

1

2

C2 E2 H2

1 1

2

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the switch. 3. Remove the operating handle and lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the switch. 3. Remove the operating handle and lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation

A2 C2 F2

4 3

2A

2B

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Closing the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Earth Switch 1. Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and A Push in the interlock button on the GF3, B Move the interlock plate across on the J4 switch. 3. Attach the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 4. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle and lock if required. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE GF3 & J4

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordTypeGF3J41

Special Notes Caution Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the earth switch. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE GF3 & J4

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE GF3 & J4 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordTypeGF3J42

Operation

A2 C2 F2

Opening the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Earth Switch 1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the earth switch. 3. Remove the operating handle and lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

1

2

B1 D1 2

Operation Access to the HV Fuses - Type GF3

2

1. Confirm the relevant circuit / transformer fuse earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the two (2) HV fuse access cover retaining bolts. 3. Raise the HV fuse access cover to the stop position as shown.

3

Operation Access to the HV Fuses - Type GF3

B1 D1

4

4. Open the HV Fuse / Link retaining clips as shown. 5. Replace the HV fuse(s) with the striker pin(s) facing towards the rear of switch unit. 6. Close the HV fuse / Link retaining clips. 7. Release the HV fuse access cover hinge latch. 8. Lower the HV fuse access cover. 9. Tighten the two (2) HV fuse access cover retaining bolts.

4

G1

2 3

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Insertion of the Test Probes - Type J4 1. Confirm the relevant circuit earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the retaining bolt at the rear of the test probe access cover. 3. Raise the access cover. 4. Insert the appropriate probes to the stop position. 5. Open the circuit earth switch. Perform tests as required. 6. Close the circuit earth switch. 7. Withdraw the probes. 8. Close the access cover. Tighten the access cover bolt.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford Type J 400 Amps 400 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

B2 D2 H2

1 2 3

Special Notes Caution

1. If required attach the operating handle to the circuit switch open / close operating mechanism. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

B2 D2 H2

2

1

B1 D1 G1

2

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Operation Closing the Circuit Earth Switch 1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and push the circuit earth switch interlock lever back to the stop position.

Status Indicators

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordTypeJ1

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the earth switch.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordTypeJ2

Operation Closing the Circuit Earth Switch

B1 D1 G1

5

4 3

Operation Opening the Circuit Earth Switch

B1 D1 G1

4

B1 D1 G1

4

2 of 2

3. Remove the operating handle from the circuit switch operating mechanism and attach it to the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 4. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit earth switch. Lock if required. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit earth switch status.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. If required unlock then lower the circuit earth switch operating handle to the stop position to open the circuit earth switch. 2. If required remove the operating handle. Note: The circuit switch cannot be operated while the operating handle remains in the earth switch position. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit earth switch status.

Operation Opening the Circuit Earth Switch 4. With the operating handle removed from the circuit earth switch operating mechanism unlock if required and pull the circuit earth switch interlock lever forward to the stop position. Lock if required.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the earth switch.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J3 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford Type J3 400/630 Amps 400/630 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

F2

2 1

F2

1

2

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C2

2

4 3

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the earth switch interlock CW and hold in this position. 3. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to earth switch open / close operating mechanism. 4. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J3

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordJ31

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J3

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE J3

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordJ32

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

C2

1

1. If required unlock the earth switch interlock. 2. Attach the operating handle to the earth switch open / close operating mechanism. 3. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. If required lock the earth switch interlock and operating mechanism. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

3

Operation Access to the Circuit Test Probes

D1

3

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open and circuit earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the retaining bolt and raise the circuit test probe access cover. 3. Insert the appropriate test probes taking care to ensure correct alignment. 4. Perform required tests. Note: To restore, reverse the above instructions.

Confirm the circuit test probes location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE R3 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Long & Crawford Type R3 400/630 Amps 400/630 Amps Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The mechanical indicators are located on the sides of the switch unit. Note: The rotation direction of the operating handle for the required function - open / close will depend on the circuit switch location on the switchgear. Confirm the required direction before operating.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose Test Probes O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

B3

2

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE R3

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordR31

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

B3

1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to the open / close operating mechanism as shown. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

D3

4

2 2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

3

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Unlock if required and slide the earth switch interlock across. 3. Unlock if required and attach the operating handle to earth switch open / close operating mechanism. 4. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE R3

LONG & CRAWFORD TYPE R3

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPLong&CrawfordR32

D3

3

1

2

Operation Opening the Earth Switch 1. Attach the operating handle to the earth switch open / close operating mechanism. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 3. If required slide the earth switch interlock across and lock. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Access to the Circuit Test Probes

A1 H1

3

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open and circuit earth switch is closed. 2. Unscrew the retaining bolt and raise the circuit test probe access cover. 3. Insert the appropriate test probes taking care to ensure correct alignment. 4. Perform required tests. Note: To restore, reverse the above instructions.

Confirm the circuit test probes location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 1

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Merlin Gerin RM6 Ring Main Isolator - Type 1 400 / 630 Amps 400 / 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the ring main isolator is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switches. Note: This switchgear can have either HV fuses or a circuit breaker controlling the transformer circuit. Apart from access to HV fuses the operating instrucitons are the same for both units.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

C4 F4

3

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

C4 F4 3

2

1. Unlock if required and lower the switch operating mechanism access cover. 2. Insert the operating handle into the circuit switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch / CB

B4 E4 H4

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Unlock if required and lower the transformer fuse switch / CB operating mechanism access cover. 2. Insert the operating handle into the transformer fuse switch / CB operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the handle CW to the stop position to close the transformer fuse switch / CB. Remove the handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch / CB status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and lower the switch operating mechanism access cover. 2. Insert the operating handle into the circuit switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

3

Oil Levels

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 1

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinRM6T11

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch / CB location and labeling prior to operation. Note: the closing operation charges the operating spring. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 1

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 1

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinRM6T12

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch - CB

B4 E4 H4 1

1. Press the red push button to open the transformer fuse switch / CB. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch / CB status.

B3 C3 E3 F3 H3

4

Operation Closing the Earth Switch 1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' using the neon indicators. 3. Unlock and lower the earth switch operating mechanism access cover. 4. Insert the operating handle into earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

5

B3 C3 E3 F3 H3

3

Operation Opening the Earth Switch 1. Unlock and lower the earth switch operating mechanism access cover. 2. Insert the operating handle into earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

2

Operation Access to the HV fuses

A4 D4 G4

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the transformer fuse earth switch is closed. 2. Raise the HV fuse access cover marginally then pull away from the transformer fuse switch unit as shown to gain access to the HV fuses.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch / CB location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labelling prior to operation. Confirm the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 2 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Merlin Gerin RM6 Ring Main Isolator - Type 2 400 / 630 Amps 400 / 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the ring main isolator is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switches. Always ensure the transformer fuse switch operating spring is charged and the operating handle is removed after closing the switch.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B2 F2

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch 1. Insert the operating handle (single locating pin end) into the circuit switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

B2 F2

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch 1. Insert the operating handle (single locating pin end) into the circuit switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

D2

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch 1. Insert the operating handle (single locating pin end) into the circuit switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the handle CW to close the transformer switch then immediately rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to charge the switch operating spring. Note: the mechanical indicator turns white. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 2

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinRM6T21

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation. Always ensure the operating spring is charged and the operating handle is removed after closing the switch. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 2

MERLIN GERIN RM6 RING MAIN ISOLATOR - TYPE 2 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

D2

1. Press down the red tab to open the transformer fuse switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

C2 E2 G2

3

Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. Perform a 'Safe To Earth test'. Unlock and lower the earth switch access interlock. Insert the operating handle (double locating pin end) into earth switch operating mechanism. 5. To Close: Rotate the handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

4

Operation Closing / Opening the Earth Switch

C2 E2 G2

7

9

7

Operation Closing / Opening the Earth Switch 1. 2. 3. 4.

5

7

8

7. Confirm the red 'earthed' indicators are in the fully raised position - attached to the earthing bar. 8. To Open: Rotate the operating handle outer sleeve 180 degrees and insert (double locating pin end) into the earth switch operating mechanism. 9. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 10. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

E3

2

2

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the HV earth switch location and labelling prior to operation. Confirm the remote end of the circuit be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the HV earth switch location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Raise the HV fuse access cover interlock tag and raise the HV fuse access cover.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

E3

3

2 of 2

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinRM6T22

3. With the HV fuse cover raised to the stop position grab and raise the HV fuse cradle locating handle as shown. 4. Pull up the HV fuse cradle assembly to withdraw the required HV fuse.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Note: Handle the HV fuses with caution as they may be hot. Note: When replacing HV fuses ensure the striker pin points up.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Merlin Gerin / Schneider SM6 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: This switchgear can have three variations of the operating mechanism. They are as follows: Push button open / close - manual spring charge. Transformer fuse switch. Operating handle open / close. Operating handle close - push button open. Confirm the switchgear type prior to operating.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch - Type C

H8

2

6

3

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap.

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Visibly confirm the circuit switch status via the view port - arrow 6.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch - Type C

H8

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Press the red 'O / OFF' button to open the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 4. Visibly confirm the circuit switch status via the view port. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap.

4

Status Indicators

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

2

G3

2

6

3 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch - Type B 1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM61

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Visibly confirm the circuit switch status via the view port - arrow 6.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM6PB2

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch - Type B

F5

6

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the circuit switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap.

2

3

F6

Operation

2

Charging the Transformer Fuse Switch Operating Spring

4

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the spring charge operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the spring charge handle CW to the stop position to charge the operating spring. Remove the handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows the operating spring has charged correctly.

3

Operation Closing the Transformer Fuse Switch

F5

4

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Press the black 'I / ON' button to close the transformer fuse switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status. 4. Visibly confirm the transformer fuse switch status via the view port. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap.

2

F5

4

2

4

2

3

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Visibly confirm the circuit switch status via the view port - arrow 6.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Circuit Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 2. Press the red 'O / OFF' button to open the transformer fuse switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 4. Visibly confirm the transformer fuse switch status via the view port. 5. If required close and lock the operating mechanism access flap.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

F2

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Unlock and open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 3. Confirm the circuit is 'Safe To Earth' via the LED indicators. 4. Insert the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

F2

Special Notes Caution

5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status. 7. If required close and lock the earth switch operating mechanism access flap.

5

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

F2

2

1

3

D7

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle to the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status. 5. If required close and lock the earth switch operating mechanism access flap.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

6 4,5 2

4,5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit switch is open and the relevant earth switch is closed. 2. Raise and lift clear the HV fuse access cover. 3. Identify the HV fuse(s) to be replaced. 4. Raise the HV fuse upper retaining cap and withdraw the required HV fuse. 5. Raise the HV fuse upper retaining cap and insert the replacement HV fuse(s). 6. Replace the HV Fuse access cover.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Confirm the HV fuse operation via the indicator as shown arrow 6. Use caution when handling the HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM63

3 of 3

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 RING MAIN SWITCH Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM64

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Merlin Gerin / Schneider SM6 Circuit Breaker 630 Amps 630 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: This switchgear is a combination of a circuit breaker and isolator. The circuit breaker must be opened before the isolator can be opened.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose Test Probes O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B6

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker

3

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the closing spring is charged correctly. 2. Confirm the isolator interlock key is in position as shown. If the interlock key is not in position then the black 'I /ON' button will remain recessed and inoperable. 3. Press the black 'I / ON' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

1 2

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker

B6

B5

2 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the isolator interlock key is in the correct position.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Press the red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

2

Status Indicators

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Raise and lower the spring charge handle app. 14 times until the operating spring is fully charged. 3. Confirm the spring charge mechanical indicator agrees with the spring status

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM6CB1

Ensure the operating spring is fully charged. The charge handle should 'latch free' when charged correctly

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

MERLIN GERIN / SCHNEIDER SM6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

B7 C2

Doc Ref: WPMGSchneiderSM6CB2

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker Isolator

2

G3

3

Confirm the isolator location and labeling prior to operation.

2

C2 G3

6

8 5

C2 G3

4

6 3

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker Isolator 4. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 5. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism. 6. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the isolator. Remove the operating handle. 7. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the isolator status. 8. Visibly confirm the isolator status via the view port.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker Isolator 1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Unlock and open the operating mechanism access flap. 3. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism. 4. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the isolator. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the isolator status. 6. Visibly confirm the isolator status via the view port.

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

G1 C1

4

1. Confirm the isolator is open. 2. Confirm the circuit is safe to earth via the indicating LEDs. 3. Unlock and open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 4. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle.

5

G1 C1

3

2 of 2

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Press in the red 'O' button and keep depressed whilst simultaneously removing the interlock key from the circuit breaker control panel. 3. Insert the interlock key into the isolator control panel as shown.

Special Notes Caution

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

2

1. If required unlock and open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to close the earth switch. Remove the operating handle.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the isolator location and labeling prior to operation. The isolator cannot be opened unless the circuit breaker is opened and the interlock key is transferred to the isolator control panel.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit test probes location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MERLIN GERIN VERCORS M6 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Merlin Gerin Vercors M6 400 Amps 400 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

A3 D3 F3

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required, and open the transparent operating mechanism interlock cover. 2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism . 3. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit switch. 4. Remove the operating handle and confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

3

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

A3 D3 F3

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Unlock if required, and open the transparent operating mechanism interlock cover. 2. Press the red 'O' open button to open the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

2

C3 E3 H3

2

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Opening / Closing the Circuit Earth Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Perform a 'Safe To Earth' test using the LED indicators. 3. Remove the padlock and release the earth switch interlock. 4. Raise and push across (to the right) the earth switch operating handle to close the circuit earth switch. 5. Push across to the left then lower the operating handle to open the cirucit earth switch.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

MERLIN GERIN VERCORS M6

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinVercorsM61

Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MERLIN GERIN VERCORS M6

MERLIN GERIN VERCORS M6

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

B4

1

Doc Ref: WPMerlinGerinVercorsM62

Operation Access to the HV Fuses 1. Confirm the relevant transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Raise the HV fuse access panel slightly and tilt forward as shown to gain access to the HV fuses.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NEBB BROWN BOVERI RGB12 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nebb Brown Boveri RGB12 400 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

C3 D3 E3

1. Unlock the circuit / transformer fuse switch closing operating handle. 2. Pull the operating handle to the stop position four (4) times then return to the upright position to close the switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit / transformer fuse switch status.

2

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

C6 D6

1. Press the red trip / open button to open the circuit switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

NEBB BROWN BOVERI RGB12

Doc Ref: WPNebbBrownBoveriRGB121

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

F7

1. Press the red trip / open button to open the circuit switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NEBB BROWN BOVERI RGB12

NEBB BROWN BOVERI RGB12 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Isolating the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

D4 E4 F4

1. Confirm the relevant circuit / transformer fuse switch is open. 2. Rotate the isolating handle ACW 90 degrees to the stop position. 3. Grasp the circuit / transformer fuse switch racking handle and withdraw the switch to the stop - isolated position.

2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

D1 E1 F1

4

2

3

1. Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch is open and in the isolated position. 2. Place the earth switch operating handle onto the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position. 4. Unlock, remove the padlock, and press the yellow button to close the earth switch. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

D1 E1 F1

2 2

1. Place the earth switch operating handle onto the earth switch operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. Remove the handle. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status.

Operation Access to the HV Fuses

G5

3 2

2 of 2

Doc Ref: WPNebbBrownBoveriRGB122

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the transformer fuse switch is open and in the isolated position and the earth switch is closed. 2. Raise the HV fuse access door interlock. 3. Open the HV fuse access door. 4. Replace the HV fuse(s) as required ensuring the striker pin is clamped to the fuse handle and the guide ring is fitted to the other end.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit / transformer to be earthed is isolated.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when removing HV fuses as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S & C SML 20 FUSE ELEMENT Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 12.7

S&C SML 20 Fuse Element Various Element - Fault Air

Special Notes Caution Confirm the correct fuse element size prior to replacement. Exercise caution when handling the blown fuse element assembly as it may be hot. For instructions on operating the fuse assembly refer to the S & C SML 20 Ground Mounted Fuse templates in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm H3

1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the fuse element has blown via the protruding red indicator as shown.

Exercise caution when handling the blown fuse element assembly as it may be hot.

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

H3 2

Status Indicators

S & C SML 20 FUSE ELEMENT

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML20Element1

Special Notes Caution

2. Using the appropriate sized ring spanner loosen the the upper fuse fitting retaining bolt. 3. Slide off the upper fuse fitting and reset (push in) the red (fuse blown) indicator.

3

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

C5

4

Special Notes Caution

4. Unscrew the silencer ACW and remove from the bottom fuse fitting. 5. Slide the bottom fuse fitting along and off the top of the fuse element barrel.

5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

S & C SML 20 FUSE ELEMENT

S & C SML 20 FUSE ELEMENT Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML20Element2

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

C6 7

6. Select the new fuse element and confirm the correct rating. 7. Slide the bottom fuse fitting over the top of the new fuse element and down the barrel ensuring the dimple aligns with the fitting locating slot as shown.

7

Confirm the fuse element rating prior to assembly.

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

C6

Special Notes Caution Use only hand presure to tighten the silencer. Do not over tighten.

8. Screw the silencer (CW) by hand onto the bottom fuse fitting until it holds firmly onto the fuse element barrel. Do not over tighten. 8

8

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

G3

Special Notes Caution

9. Line up the slot in the fuse element barrel with the upper fuse fitting internal alignment peg.

9

Operation Replacing the Fuse Element

H3

Special Notes Caution

10. Slide the upper fuse fitting onto the fuse element barrel and firmly tighten the retaining nut - do not over tighten.

10

10

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Do not over tighten the top fuse fitting retaining bolt.

The fuse element is now ready to be placed into service. Refer to the S & C SML 20 Ground Mounted Fuse template in this manual for operating instructions.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 12.7

S&C SML 20 Ground Mounted Fuse 200 Load - Fuse Rating, Element - Fault Air

Special Notes Caution Opening and closing of the fuse shall only be performed with a rated operating stick and standard hook stick fitting. The fuse assembly shall only be removed / replaced with a rated operating stick with a proper fuse extractor fitting attached. Safe working clearances shall be maintained from all live equipment inside the cabinet at all times. For instructions on replacing the fuse element refer to the S & C SML 20 Fuse Element template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening the Fuse Unit

A4

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and open the primary cabinet door. Note: the primary (front) cabinet door will have a standard operating lock. The secondary (rear) cabinet door should have a special lock with the key located inside the primary cabinet door.

Operation Opening the Fuse Unit

N/A

Status Indicators

Confirm the ground mounted fuse labeling and location prior to opening.

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML201

Special Notes Caution

2. Grasp the two circular lifting handles on the Perspex safety cover as shown. Lift the cover to clear the keyhole shaped screw slots then carefully remove and stow appropriately.

3

G1

Special Notes Caution

45 D egre es

3

Operation Opening the Fuse Unit 3. Insert the operating stick hook into the fuse operating eyehole as shown. 4. Pull open the fuse in a firm an continuous motion until it reaches the rest stop app. 45 degrees from the vertical position. Note: the spring operated Uniruptor arc control device will extinguish any rated load arc. 5. Remove the operating stick. 6. Carefully replace the Perspex safety cover. 7. Close and lock the primary cabinet door.

The arc shield safety cover, at the top inside the main safety cover, shall not be removed whilst the fuse upper fixed contacts are alive.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML202

Operation Closing the Fuse Unit

A4

1. Unlock and open the primary cabinet door. Note: the primary (front) cabinet door will have a standard operating lock. The secondary (rear) cabinet door should have a special lock with the key located inside the primary cabinet door.

Operation Closing the Fuse Unit

N/A

Confirm the ground mounted fuse labeling and location prior to opening.

Special Notes Caution

2. Grasp the two circular lifting handles on the Perspex safety cover as shown. Lift the cover to clear the keyhole shaped screw slots then carefully remove and stow appropriately.

Operation Closing the Fuse Unit

G1

4

3. Insert the operating stick hook into the fuse operating eyehole as shown. 4. Push the fuse closed in a firm an continuous motion to the stop position. 5. Confirm the fuse upper contact and Uniruptor have correctly engaged with the upper fixed contact. 6. Remove the operating stick. 7. Carefully replace the Perspex safety cover. 8. Close and lock the primary cabinet door.

3

Operation Removing the Fuse Unit

N/A

3

4

1. Confirm the fuse is in the open position. 2. Confirm the Perspex safety cover has been removed. 3. Attach the fuse extractor fitting to the operating stick as shown. 4. Place the extractor assembly onto the fuse assembly as shown.

Operation Removing the Fuse Unit 5. Lift the fuse assembly out of the bottom fixed hinge assembly and then clear of the cabinet. Note: this can only be done if the fuse angle is kept to 45 degrees.

egre

es

N/A

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution The arc shield safety cover, at the top inside the main safety cover, shall not be removed whilst the fuse upper fixed contacts are alive.

Special Notes Caution Warning: the top fixed contact is alive. The fuse unit is heavy. Exercise caution when lifting out of the fixed hinge contacts.

Special Notes Caution Warning: the top fixed contact is alive. The fuse unit is heavy. Exercise caution when lifting into position.

45 D

5

2 of 3

Special Notes Caution

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Operation Replacing the Fuse Unit

N/A

4

3

Special Notes Caution Warning: the top fixed contact is alive.

1. If applicable confirm the earth clamp has been removed from the lower fixed hinge fitting. 2. Confirm the Perspex safety cover has been removed. 3. Confirm the fuse extractor fitting is attached to the operating stick as shown. 4. Place the extractor assembly onto the fuse assembly as shown.

The fuse unit is heavy. Exercise caution when lifting into position.

Operation Replacing the Fuse Unit

45 D

egre

es

N/A

6

C8

4 3

C 6 If 7

5

Special Notes Caution Warning: the top fixed contact is alive.

5. Lift the fuse unit, maintaining a 45 degree angle, into position directly above the lower fixed hinge fitting. 6. Lower the fuse unit until the hinge hooks engage with the hinge rods. You may have to jiggle the unit to ensure the hinge hooks correctly engage. 7. Remove the operating stick. The fuse unit should remain at the 45 degree angle. The fuse unit can now closed when required.

The fuse unit is heavy. Exercise caution when lifting into position.

Operation Earthing the Outgoing Feeder Cable

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the fuse assembly has been removed from the fuse cabinet. 2. Confirm the Perspex safety cover has been removed. 3. Confirm the earth stick lead is connected to the cabinet internal earth. 4. Using an approved device perform a 'Safe to Earth' test on the lower fixed hinge fitting.

Operation Earthing the Outgoing Feeder Cable

Special Notes Caution

5. Attach the tighten the earth clamp to the earthing rod on the lower fixed hinge fitting as shown. To remove the earth unscrew the earth clamp and remove from the lower fixed hinge fitting.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Warning: the top fixed contact is alive. Safe working clearances must be maintained when attaching earths.

Warning: the top fixed contact is alive. Safe working clearances must be maintained when attaching earths.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML203

3 of 3

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE

S & C SML 20 GROUND MOUNTED FUSE Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPS&CSML204

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

SCHNEIDER D14 CIRCUIT SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Schneider D14 Circuit Switch 100 Amps 100 Amps SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose Test Probes O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Charging The Operating Spring

G4 G7

2 1 3

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and open the circuit switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the spring charge handle CW to the stop position to charge the operating spring. Remove the spring charge handle. 4. Confirm the spring has charged correctly via the mechanical indicator.

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch

G3 G7

3

1

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Unlock if required and open the circuit switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Confirm the closing spring is charged correctly. 3. Press the black 'I / ON' button to close the HV Switch. 4. Confirm the semaphore agrees with the HV switch status. 5. Close and lock if required the circuit switch operating mechanism access flap.

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and open the circuit switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Press the red 'O / OFF' button to open the circuit switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status. 4. Close and lock if required the circuit switch operating mechanism access flap.

2

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch

G4 G8

Status Indicators

SCHNEIDER D14 CIRCUIT SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderD141

Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

SCHNEIDER D14 CIRCUIT SWITCH

SCHNEIDER D14 CIRCUIT SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderD142

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

G1 G5

4

3

2 5

1. Confirm the relevant circuit switch is open. 2. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' via the indicators. 3. Unlock if required and open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 4. Inset the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

G1 G5

2

1

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth switch status at the completion of the operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and open the earth switch operating mechanism access flap. 2. Inset the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the earth status.

Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

SIEMENS 8CK2 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Siemens 8CK2 400 Amps 400 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: The transformer fuse switch has a different operating mechanism to the circuit switches. Note: This switchgear can have two different systems of circuit earthing: • Spring assisted • Manual Confirm the circuit earthing system prior to operation.

SIEMENS 8CK2

Doc Ref: WPSiemens8CK21

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B7 D7 F7

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit Switch 1. Insert the operating handle into operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW until the circuit switch closes. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

B7 D7 F7

Operation Opening the Circuit Switch 1. Insert the operating handle into operating mechanism. 2. Rotate the operating handle CW until the circuit switch opens. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit switch status.

E6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Opening the Transformer Fuse Switch

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation. Prior to operation confirm the truck mechanical indicator indicates 'Operating Position'.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the transformer fuse switch red 'O' open button to open the transformer fuse switch. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the transformer fuse switch status.

Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

SIEMENS 8CK2

SIEMENS 8CK2 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPSiemens8CK22

Operation Isolating the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch

C8 E8 G8

1. Remove the padlock and safety clip from the release button. 2. Press the release button. 3. Pull the switch out to the stop position. 4. If required, reattach the safety clip and padlock to the release button.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Restoring the Switch to the Service Position

Special Notes Caution

1. If required, remove the padlock and safety clip from the release button. 2. Press the release button. 3. Push the switch into the service position. 4. Reattach the safety clip and padlock to the release button.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Ensure the switch is open prior to isolation.

1

C8 E8 G8

3

D4

Operation Access to the HV fuses

3

1. Place transformer fuse switch into the 'Isolate Position 1'. (As per the 'Isolating the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch' instruction) 2. Push the release button and pull the transformer fuse switch to the stop position. 3. Remove HV fuse access cover panel.

Operation Earthing Via the Earth Trident Firing Mechanism

F6

6

5

F6

Ensure the switch is open prior to restoration.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation. Note: Handle the HV fuses with caution as they may be hot.

Note: When replacing HV fuses ensure the striker pin is points up.

2

1. Confirm the switch is open and in the 'Isolation Position 1'. (As per the 'Isolating the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch' instruction) 2. Perform a Safe To Earth test. 3. Attach the earth tail to the earth grid connector. 4. Load the earth trident into the firing mechanism. 5. Raise the earth probe access flap and insert the earth mechanism into position as shown. 6. Pull the earth firing lever to earth the circuit.

Operation Earthing Via the Manual Earth Trident

5 6

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the switch is open and in the 'Isolation Position 1'. (As per the 'Isolating the Circuit / Transformer Fuse Switch' instruction) 2. Perform a Safe To Earth test. 3. Attach the earth tail to the earth grid connector. 4. Raise the earth probe access flap. 5. Insert the earth trident into position as shown. 6. Push the earth trident into the earth position in a firm and positive manner.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when loading the earthing trident into the firing mechanism. Ensure the trident latches firmly when inserted.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the earth trident is pushed into the earth position in a firm and positive manner.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

WESTERN POWER MECHANICAL ACTUATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Western Power Mechanical Actuator N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution Ensure the switchgear mechanical actuators are fit for service prior to and after operation. The TRU control must be in the local position for any local electrical operation of the mechanical actuators. These mechanical actuators are found on Long & Crawford T4GF3 and Type J (Various) switchgear. For further instructions on switching these units please refer to the relevant templates in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing / Opening the Mechanical Actuator

A6 C6 F6

2

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Switch the RTU control to the local position. 2. Switch the relevant mechanical actuator control switch to the 'I' on position. 3. Plug in the operating control switch to the isolator to be operated.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation.

3

A7 C7 F7

45

A2 H2 G1

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing / Opening the Mechanical Actuator

Special Notes Caution

4. Rotate the control switch ACW to the 'ON' position to close the switch with the mechanical actuator. 5. Rotate the control switch CW to the 'OFF' position to open the switch with the mechanical actuator. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the switch status. 7. Unplug the operating control switch. 8. Switch the mechanical actuator to the 'O' off position. 9. Switch the RTU control to the remote position.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to operation. At the completion of the operation ensure the RTU control is switched to the remote position.

Operation Disconnecting the Mechanical Actuators

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the RTU control is in the local position and the relevant mechanical actuator control switch is in the 'O' off position. 2. Raise the mechanical actuator retaining clip as shown.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

WESTERN POWER MECHANICAL ACTUATOR

Doc Ref: WPWPMechanicalActuator1

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to disconnecting the mechanical actuator. Ensure the mechanical actuator control switch is in the 'O' off position prior to disconnection.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

WESTERN POWER MECHANICAL ACTUATOR

WESTERN POWER MECHANICAL ACTUATOR

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPWPMechanicalActuator2

A2 H2 G1

Operation Disconnecting the Mechanical Actuators

Special Notes Caution

3. Slide out the mechanical actuator retaining clip as shown.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to disconnecting the mechanical actuator.

Operation Disconnecting the Mechanical Actuators

Special Notes Caution

3

A2 H2 G1

4

4. Lower the mechanical actuator. The switchgear can now be operated using the supplied manual operating handles. Refer to the relevant switchgear template in this manual for further instructions if required.

Confirm the circuit / transformer fuse switch location and labeling prior to disconnecting the mechanical actuator.

Note: To restore the mechanical actuator to service reverse the above instructions.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB NWI-58 POLE TOP CAPACITOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 12.7

ABB NWI-58 Pole Top Capacitor 1.2 MVA, 500 KVA HV Drop-out Fuses - No Current Oil / Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Note: AT ALL TIMES a period of at least five (5) minutes must be allowed to elapse between the capacitor modules being switched off and the application of earths. Note: The HV drop-out fuses MUST NOT be used to make or break the capacitor current. The capacitor bank must only be closed onto the network via the 'AUTO' mode. Two types of contol boxes are used with these capacitor banks (IntelliCAP Plus, 1000 Series). Control logic is the same for both. For instructions on opening, closing and removal of the HV drop-out (HVDO) fuses refer to the HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES template in this manual.

IntelliCAP Plus

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation

Earthing HV Fuses 1000 Series

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation IntelliCAP Plus

F4

Disabling the Capacitor Control Remote Auto Functions

3

S Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and open the control box access door. 2. Press the 'SCADA CONTROL' 'CHANGE' button to switch the control to 'LOCAL' and confirm the red 'LOCAL' LED illuminates. 3. Press the 'OPERATIONAL MODE' 'CHANGE' button to to switch the control to 'MANUAL' and confirm the red 'MANUAL' LED illuminates.

Confirm the capacitor location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation IntelliCAP Plus Closing the Capacitor Module CBs - Local Elec.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the capacitor remote / auto functions are disabled. 2. Press the 'LAST BANK COMMAND' 'CLOSE' button and confirm the red 'CLOSE' LED illuminates - blinking rapidly. 3. Confirm countdown to close sequence on the LCD display - (close in 30 seconds). 4. Move away from the capacitors until closed. 5. Confirm all three (3) capacitor module CBs have closed and the 'CLOSE' LED ceases blinking.

Note: The close sequence can be cancelled by momentarily changing the 'OPERATION MODE' to the 'AUTO' position then returning to the 'MANUAL' position. The capacitor bank must only be closed onto the network via the 'AUTO' mode.

ABB NWI-58 POLE TOP CAPACITOR

Doc Ref: WPABBNWI58Capacitor1

2

G4

3

2 F4

Operation IntelliCAP Plus Opening the Capacitor Module CBs - Local Elec.

3

2 Document Number mber PSC/80/3(78)V1 P

1. Confirm the capacitor remote / auto functions are disabled. 2. Press the 'LAST BANK COMMAND' 'OPEN' button and confirm the red 'OPEN' LED illuminates - blinking rapidly. 3. Confirm countdown to open sequence on the LCD display - (open in 30 seconds). 4. Move away from the capacitors until opened. 5. Confirm all three (3) capacitor module CBs have opened and the 'OPEN' LED ceases blinking. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Note: The close sequence can be cancelled by momentarily changing the 'OPERATION MODE' to the 'AUTO' position then returning to the 'MANUAL' position.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB NWI-58 POLE TOP CAPACITOR

ABB NWI-58 POLE TOP CAPACITOR Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBNWI58Capacitor2

Operation IntelliCAP Plus

F4

1. Press the 'OPERATIONAL MODE' 'CHANGE' button to to switch the control to 'AUTO' and confirm the red 'AUTO' LED illuminates. 2. Press the 'SCADA CONTROL' 'CHANGE' button to switch the control to 'REMOTE' and confirm the red 'REMOTE' LED illuminates. 3. Close and lock the control box access door.

1

Confirm the capacitor location and labeling prior to any operation.

2

Operation 1000 Series Closing / Opening - 1000 Series

G6

Special Notes Caution Confirm the capacitor location and labeling prior to any operation.

1. Aside from the use of toggle switches and some naming terminology the operation control logic of the 1000 Series control boxes is the same as the IntelliCAP Plus control boxes.

The capacitor bank must only be closed onto the network via the 'AUTO' mode.

Operation Isolating the Pole Mounted Capacitor

C1 D2 E7

Special Notes Caution WARNING: The HV drop-out fuses must never be used to switch the capacitor banks.

1. Confirm the 'SCADA CONTROL is in the 'LOCAL' position - red LED illuminated. 2. Confirm the 'OPERATIONAL MODE' is in the 'MANUAL' position - red LED illuminated. 3. Confirm the three (3) capacitor module CBs are open. 4. Open the three (3) HV drop-out fuses. Refer to the HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES template in this manual for instructions if required.

4 4 4

Operation Discharging / Earthing the Capacitor Modules

B6

3 3 3

B6 9

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Enabling the Capacitor Control Remote Auto Functions

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the 'SCADA CONTROL is in the 'LOCAL' position - red LED illuminated. 2. Confirm the 'OPERATIONAL MODE' is in the 'MANUAL' position - red LED illuminated. 3. Confirm the three (3) capacitor module CBs are open. 4. Confirm the three (3) HV drop-out fuses are open. 5. Wait for five (5) minutes then confirm, using an approved tester, that each phase of the capacitor has been de-energised by the module CBs.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the capacitor location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation O Discharging / Earthing the Capacitor Modules

Special Notes Caution

6. Attach earths to the bottom contacts of the open HV drop-out fuses. 7. Electrically close the capacitor module CBs. Refer to the Closing the Capacitor Module CBs - Local Elec. instruction. 8. Confirm all three (3) phases have closed correctly. 9. Attach an earth to the capacitors star point.

Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALM AIR BREAK SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ALM Air Break Switch 400 Amps No greater than 10 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the air break switch is fit for service prior to and after operation. To avoid damage to knuckles use an 'open hand' at the completion of the opening or closing handle motion.

Operation Options Opening - Manual Operating Handle Closing - Manual Operating Handle Latching Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar.

Labeling

Correct Latching

ALM AIR BREAK SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPALMABS1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has closed and latched correctly.

3

2

Operation Confirm Latching

F3

1. Confirm the air break switch has latched correctly when closed as shown.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation. Use an open hand at the completion of the closing handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ALM AIR BREAK SWITCH

ALM AIR BREAK SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

N/A

2 1,3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Doc Ref: WPALMABS2

Operation Opening the Air Break Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to open the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has opened correctly.

Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Use an open hand at the completion of the opening handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

FALCON AIR BREAK SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Falcon Air Break Switch 400 Amps No greater than 10 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the air break switch is fit for service prior to and after operation. To avoid damage to knuckles use an 'open hand' at the completion of the opening or closing handle motion. Confirm the flexible tail (Refer to the main picture - C 1, H 2) on the moving portion of the switch cannot flex inwards when opening the switch. If in doubt DO NOT operate live.

Operation Options Opening - Manual Operating Handle Closing - Manual Operating Handle Latching Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

Correct Latching

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar.

Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

FALCON AIR BREAK SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPFalconABS1

1

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has closed and latched correctly.

3

2

Operation Confirm Latching

F3

1. Confirm the air break switch has latched correctly when closed as shown.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation. Use an open hand at the completion of the closing handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

FALCON AIR BREAK SWITCH

FALCON AIR BREAK SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

N/A

2 1,3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Doc Ref: WPFalconABS2

Operation Opening the Air Break Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to open the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has opened correctly.

Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Use an open hand at the completion of the opening handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

FALCON - EZYBREAK AIR BREAK SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Falcon Ezybreak Air Break Switch 400 Amps No greater than 20 Amps Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the air break switch is fit for service prior to and after operation. To avoid damage to knuckles use an 'open hand' at the completion of the opening or closing handle motion. Confirm the flexible tail (Refer to the main picture - B 5) on the moving portion of the switch cannot flex inwards when opening the switch. If in doubt DO NOT operate live.

Operation Options Opening - Manual Operating Handle Closing - Manual Operating Handle Latching Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

Correct Latching

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar.

Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Air Break Switch

N/A

2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has closed and latched correctly.

3

2

Operation Confirm Latching

F3

1. Confirm the air break switch has latched correctly when closed as shown.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation. Use an open hand at the completion of the closing handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

FALCON - EZYBREAK AIR BREAK SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPFalconEzybreakABS1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

1 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

FALCON - EZYBREAK AIR BREAK SWITCH

FALCON - EZYBREAK AIR BREAK SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

N/A

2 1,3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Doc Ref: WPFalconEzybreakABS2

Operation Opening the Air Break Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock and remove the operating handle interlock bar. 2. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to open the air break switch. 3. Replace the operating handle interlock bar and lock. 4. Confirm the air break switch has opened correctly.

Confirm the air break switch location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Use an open hand at the completion of the opening handle motion to avoid damage to knuckles.

HAYCOLEC SECTIONALISER TYPE 01-04 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Haycolec Sectionaliser Type 01-04 Various Sectionaliser: Fault, Opening: Load Rating Air

Voltage KV 33 330 22 220 11 132 66 12.7

Special Notes Caution For instructions on opening, closing and removal of the sectionaliser refer to the HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm C7 G7

2

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Resetting the Sectionaliser Operating Trundle 1. Move the operating trundle to its latching position as shown. 2. Rotate the latching pin so it is pointing away from the trundle as shown.

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the Sectionaliser is safe to handle after removal - it may be hot.

1

C7 G7

3

Operation Resetting the Sectionaliser Operating Trundle

HAYCOLEC SECTIONALISER TYPE 01-04

Doc Ref: WPHaycolecSect01041

Special Notes Caution Ensure the latching pin is in the correct position before moving the spring loaded flap.

3. Using the thumb and finger as shown carefully move the spring loaded flap towards the latching pin.

3 3

C7 G7

Operation Resetting the Sectionaliser Operating Trundle

Special Notes Caution

4. Rotate the latching pin to the latch position as shown then carefully release the spring loaded flap. The sectionaliser is now ready for service.

Avoid injury to fingers. Release the spring loaded flap carefully.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

4 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1 of 2

HAYCOLEC SECTIONALISER TYPE 01-04

HAYCOLEC SECTIONALISER TYPE 01-04

2 of 2

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPHaycolecSect01042

Operation Setting the Sectionaliser DIP Switches

C7 G7

Special Notes Caution

1. Remove the top cap of the sectionaliser by unscrewing the two (2) retaining allen key bolts as shown.

1

C7 G7

Stow the allen key bolts safely after removal.

1

Operation Setting the Sectionaliser DIP Switches

3

Special Notes Caution

2. Determine the required DIP Switch settings from the table below. 3. Using a small bladed screw driver set the DIP switches to the required setting.

Reconfirm the DIP switch positions after setting.

Operation Setting the Sectionaliser DIP Switches

C7 G7

Special Notes Caution

4. Replace the top cap ensuring the allen key screws are tightened firmly to seal against water ingress.

4

Ensure the allen key screws are tightened firmly.

Sectionaliser Field Settings Position of the DIP Switch

Sectionaliser Type SECT 01

Sectionaliser Type SECT 04

1

2

3

4

Pick-Up (A)

No. of Count

Pick-Up (A)

No. of Count

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

8

1

40

1

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

8

2

40

2

ON

OFF

ON

ON

8

3

40

3

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

16

1

56

1

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

16

2

56

2

OFF

ON

ON

ON

16

3

56

3

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

20

1

80

1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

20

2

80

2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

20

3

80

3

ON

ON

ON

OFF

24

1

112

1

ON

ON

OFF

ON

24

2

112

2

ON

ON

ON

ON

24

3

112

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Manufacturer: Various Model: HV Drop-out Fuses (HVDO) Rating: Various Break Rating: Fuse: Fault, Opening: Load up to fuse rating Insulant: Air

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution The HVDO assembly should not be left in the open position for extended periods of time as water may enter and damage the HV fuse tube. After removing the HVDO assembly care should be taken prior to handling as the HV fuse unit may be hot. Note: These HVDO fuses are made by various manufacturers and may have subtle design variations however the operating principles remain the same. Note: If the HVDO fuses are required as an isolation point they must be removed from the lower hinge fitting and stowed appropriately.

Operation Options Opening - HV Operating Stick Closing - HV Operating Stick HVDO Fuses Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the HVDO Fuse

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the HVDO open / close operating eye hole as shown. 2. Raise the HVDO and push firmly closed

1

Correct Latching

Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on the HVDO lower hinged fitting during closing.

HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES

Doc Ref: WPHVDOFuses1

2

Operation Opening the HVDO Fuse

E2 F4 F5

1 2

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the HVDO open / close operating eye hole as shown. 2. Pull open the HVDO in a smart and continuous motion to the fully lowered position.

Operation Removing / Replacing the HVDO Fuse

C4 D6 E7

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. With the HVDO in the open position place the HV operating stick pin in the HVDO hinge operating eye hole as shown. 2. Lift the HVDO out of hinge mechanism and remove.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on the HVDO lower hinged fitting during opening.

Special Notes Caution Warning: The HVDO may be hot. Exercise caution when handling.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES

HV DROP-OUT (HVDO) FUSES

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

C4 D6 E7

Doc Ref: WPHVDOFuses2

Operation Isolation Point - Removal of the HVDO Fuses

Special Notes Caution

If the HVDO fuses are required as an isolation point they must be removed from the lower hinge fitting as shown and stowed appropriately. Refer to the Switching Operators Manual Section 8.8 for details if required.

Confirm the HVDO fuses location and labeling prior to any operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HVDO Fuse Removed

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

McGRAW EDISON RV ACR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

McGraw Edison RV ACR N/A N/A Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the ACR is fit for service prior to and after operation. This type of ACR may or may not be equipped with a manual 'GROUND TRIP' lever. Confirm options prior to operating.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the ACR - Local Manual

D2

1

1. Insert the operating switch stick pin into the outer operating lever eye hole as shown. 2. Push up the operating lever to the stop position to close the ACR. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation Opening the ACR - Local Manual

D2

1

1. Insert the operating switch stick pin into the outer operating lever eye hole as shown. 2. Pull down the operating lever to the stop position to open the ACR. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation Disabling the ACR Auto Reclose

D2

1

1. Place the operating switch stick pin onto the inner operating lever as shown. 2. Pull down the operating lever to the stop position to disable the ACR auto reclose.

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

McGRAW EDISON RV ACR

Doc Ref: WPMcGrawEdisonRVACR1

Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation. Note: The ACR auto reclose MUST be disabled if closing after a lockout operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the correct operating lever is selected prior to operating.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

McGRAW EDISON RV ACR

McGRAW EDISON RV ACR

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMcGrawEdisonRVACR2

Operation

D2

Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose 1. Place the operating switch stick pin onto the inner operating lever as shown. 2. Push up the operating lever to the stop position to enable the ACR auto reclose.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation - If Fitted Blocking / Enabling the ACR Ground Trip Prot.

N/A

1. Insert the operating switch stick pin into the ground trip operating lever eye hole as shown. 2. Push up the operating pin to the stop position to block (disable) the ground trip protection on the ACR. 3. Pull down the operating pin to the stop position to turn on (enable) the ground trip protection on the ACR.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC N24-150 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nulec N24-150 Auto Circuit Recloser 630 Amps 12.5 KA SF6

Special Notes Caution Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation. The circuit recloser remote operation function must be disabled before any local operation (apart from manual opening) can take place. Refer to either the: Nulec ACR Electronic Recloser Control or the: Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control template in the Miscellaneous section of this manual for local electrical operating instructions. Note: Confirm the electronic control box type prior to operating.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Opening the ACR - Local Manual

F7

1 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the yellow operating lever. 2. Pull down the operating lever to the stop position to open the circuit recloser. Note: If the yellow lever is held in the fully lowered position the recloser cannot be closed electrically. This lever is spring loaded and will return to the normal position when released. 3. Remove the HV operating stick. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit recloser status. (Open)

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Correct Latching

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit recloser location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation of the circuit recloser is always the preferred method of operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC N24-150 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

Doc Ref: WPNulecN24150ACR1

1 of 1

NULEC N24-150 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

NULEC N24-150 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPNulecN24150ACR2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC RL LOAD BREAK SWITCH / SECTIONALISER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Nulec RL Load Break Switch / Sectionaliser 630 Amps 630 Amps - Fault Rating 12.5 kA SF6

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 12.7

Special Notes Caution Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation. The remote operation function must be disabled before any local operation can take place. Refer to the: Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control template in the Miscellaneous section of this manual for local electrical operating instructions. If fitted, confirm the by-pass air break switch is opened and locked prior to operating the load break switch. This unit may be used as an LBS or sectionaliser.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm C4 E1

2 3

1

E7 5

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Switch - Local Manual

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the yellow operating lock out lever is in the fully raised position as shown. 2. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the red (raised) end of the manual operating lever. 3. Pull down the manual operating lever to the stop position to close the switch. 4. Remove the HV operating stick.

Remote operation is always the preferred method. Ensure the remote operation function is disabled prior to any local manual operation.

Operation Closing the Switch - Local Manual

Special Notes Caution

5. Confirm the switch has closed correctly via the mechanical indicator pointing to 'ON' as shown.

B4 E1 1 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Opening the Switch - Local Manual

Special Notes Caution

1. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the green (raised) end of the manual operating lever. 2. Pull down the manual operating lever to the stop position to open the switch. 3. Remove the HV operating stick.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

NULEC RL LOAD BREAK SWITCH / SECTIONALISER

Doc Ref: WPNulecRLLBS1

Remote operation is always the preferred method. Ensure the remote operation function is disabled prior to any local manual operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NULEC RL LOAD BREAK SWITCH / SECTIONALISER

NULEC RL LOAD BREAK SWITCH / SECTIONALISER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPNulecRLLBS2

Operation Opening the Switch - Local Manual

E7 4

Special Notes Caution

4. Confirm the switch has opened correctly via the mechanical indicator pointing to 'OFF' as shown.

Operation Locking the Switch in the Open Position

C4

2 3

1. Confirm the switch is open. 2. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the yellow operating lockout lever. 3. Pull down the operating lockout lever to the stop position to lock the switch in the open position. 4. Remove the HV operating stick.

Operation Unlocking the Switch

C4

Special Notes Caution Confirm the switch location and labeling prior to operating. Ensure the remote operation function is disabled prior to locking the switch in the open position.

Special Notes Caution

2

1. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the yellow operating lockout lever. 2. Push up the operating lockout lever to the stop position to unlock the switch. 3. Remove the HV operating stick.

Ensure the remote operation function is disabled prior to unlocking the switch.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1

NULEC U27 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nulec U27 Auto Circuit Recloser 630 Amps 12.5 KA SF6

Special Notes Caution Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation. The circuit recloser remote operation function must be disabled before any local operation (apart from manual opening) can take place. Refer to either the: Nulec ACR Electronic Recloser Control or the: Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control template in the Miscellaneous section of this manual for local electrical operating instructions. Note: Confirm the electronic control box type prior to operating.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Opening the ACR - Local Manual

C5

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Place the HV operating stick pin into the eye hole of the yellow operating lever. 2. Pull down the operating lever to the stop position to open the circuit recloser. 3. Remove the HV operating stick. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit recloser status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Correct Latching

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit recloser location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation of the circuit recloser is always the preferred method of operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC U27 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

Doc Ref: WPNulecU27ACR1

1 of 1

NULEC U27 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

NULEC U27 AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPNulecU27ACR2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC W SERIES SINGLE PHASE AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nulec W Series Single Phase ACR 6 KA 400 Amps Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote operation of this ACR is always the preferred method of operation. These ACRs require a separate LV supply. The circuit recloser remote operation function must be disabled before any local operation (apart from manual opening) can take place. Refer to the: Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control template in the Miscellaneous section of this manual for local electrical operating instructions. Note: The ACR may emit X-Rays if voltage higher than the rated maximum is applied across the open contact. In such a case personnel must be protected with appropriate shielding.

Operation Options Opening - Manual (HV Operating Stick) Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

1

B6 E4

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening the ACR - Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the yellow operating lever as shown. 2. Pull down the yellow operating lever to the stop position to open the circuit recloser. Note: If the yellow operating lever is left in the fully lowered position the recloser is mechanically locked open and cannot be closed electrically. 3. Remove the HV operating stick. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit recloser status (Open)

2

Correct Latching

Confirm the auto circuit recloser location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation of the auto circuit recloser is always the preferred method of operation.

4 2

B6 E4

1

Operation Re-enabling the ACR Operating Functions

Special Notes Caution

1. Place the HV operating stick pin onto the yellow operating lever as shown. 2. Raise the yellow operating lever to the stop position as shown. The ACR can now be operated electrically. 3. Remove the HV operating stick.

Confirm the auto circuit recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

NULEC W SERIES SINGLE PHASE AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

Doc Ref: WPNulecWSeriesSPACR1

1 of 1

NULEC W SERIES SINGLE PHASE AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER

NULEC W SERIES SINGLE PHASE AUTO CIRCUIT RECLOSER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPNulecWSeriesSPACR2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE OYT RECLOSER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 12.7

Reyrolle OYT Recloser Various Various Oil

Special Notes Caution Confirm the recloser is fit for service prior to and after any operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Disabling the Recloser Auto Reclose

C7 G2

2 1

Special Notes Caution

1. Using a HV operating stick pull down the outer operating lever to the stop position to disable the recloser auto reclose. 2. At the completion of the operation the indicating lever will point to the 'ONE TRIP TO LO' arrow. 3. The inner operating lever will also move down app. 30 degrees.

Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Enabling the Recloser Auto Reclose

C7 G2

2

Status Indicators

REYROLLE OYT RECLOSER

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleOYT1

Special Notes Caution

1. Using a HV operating stick push up the inner operating lever to the stop position as shown to enable the recloser auto reclose. 2. At the completion of the operation the indicating lever will point to the beginning of 'ONE TRIP TO LO' as shown.

Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Disabling the Recloser Earth Fault Protection

Special Notes Caution

1. Using a HV operating stick pull down the 'EF RELAY' operating lever to the stop (OUT) position to disable the recloser earth fault protection.

Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

1

G6

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

REYROLLE OYT RECLOSER

REYROLLE OYT RECLOSER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleOYT2

C7

Operation Enabling the Recloser Earth Fault Protection

Special Notes Caution

1. Using a HV operating stick push up the 'EF RELAY' operating lever to the stop position as shown to enable the recloser earth fault protection.

Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening the Recloser

C7 G2

4 2 1

C7 G2

2 3

1. Using a HV operating stick pull down the inner operating lever to the stop position to open the recloser. 2. At the completion of the operation the indicating lever will point to the 'TO LO' arrow. 3. The outer operating lever will also move down app. 90 degrees. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 'OFF'.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Recloser After Manual Opening

Special Notes Caution

1. Using a HV operating stick push up the inner operating lever to the stop position as shown to close the recloser. 2. The indicating lever will move to the left as shown. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 'ON'.

Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Closing the Recloser After Fault Lockout

C7 G2

2 3

1. Using a HV operating stick pull down the inner operating lever to the stop position then push back up to the stop position as shown to close the recloser. 2. The indicating lever will move to the right then back to the left as shown during this operation. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 'ON'.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the recloser location and labeling prior to operation.

1

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S&C FAULT TAMER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

S&C Fault Tamer Various Fault Air

Special Notes Caution The Fault Tamer assembly should not be left in the open position for extended periods of time as water may enter and damage the HV fuse tube. After removing the Fault Tamer assembly care should be taken prior to handling as the HV fuse unit may be hot.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Fault Tamer

A4 F2

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the Fault Tamer open / close operating eye hole. 2. Raise the Fault Tamer and push firmly closed.

2

S & C FAULT TAMER

Doc Ref: WPS&CFaultTamer1

Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on Fault Tamer lower hinged fitting during closing.

1

Operation Opening the Fault Tamer

A4 F2

1 2

C5 G7 1

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on Fault Tamer lower hinged fitting during opening.

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the Fault Tamer open / close operating eye hole. 2. Pull open the Fault Tamer in a smart and continuous motion to the fully lowered position.

Operation Removing the Fault Tamer

Special Notes Caution

1. With the Fault Tamer in the open position place the HV operating stick pin in the Fault Tamer hinge operating eye hole. 2. Lift the Fault Tamer out of hinge mechanism and remove.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Warning: The Fault Tamer may be hot. Exercise caution prior to handling.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

S & C FAULT TAMER

S&C FAULT TAMER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

F4

Doc Ref: WPS&CFaultTamer2

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

1

1. Unscrew the collar nut and remove the fuse tube from the back up limiter assembly.

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

F4 G5 2A

Testing the back up limiter HV fuse: 2. Using a multi-meter on the continuity setting test the back up limiter HV fuse by placing the test probes on the button contact (2A) and the trunnion (2B) as shown in the photograph. If the back up limiter DOES NOT have continuity remove the trunnion and discard the limiter.

2B

F1

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

3 4 5

3

F1

6

3. Unscrew the fuse tube cap. 4. Remove the spring and cable assembly (and blown fuse debris). 5. Remove any debris from the fuse tube bore.

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element 6. Push the upper ferrule down to the stop position (latched)

6

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

N/A

7. Screw a new fuse cartridge into the spring and cable assembly. 8. Rotate the red beaded pull tab so that it aligns with the fuse cartridge assembly.

7

Special Notes Caution Warning: The Fault Tamer may be hot. Exercise caution when handling.

Special Notes Caution Testing of the back up limiter HV fuse must be performed after every Fault Tamer operation. Remove any debris in the exhaust control device of the limiter.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit three phase switch link location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the ferrule is latched correctly prior to insertion of the new fuse element assembly.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the fuse cartridge is screwed in to the spring and cable assembly until the thread bottoms.

7

8

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S&C FAULT TAMER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

F1

Special Notes Caution

9. Insert the fuse cartridge / spring and cable assembly into the fuse tube as shown and screw on the fuse tube cab and tighten securely.

Ensure the fuse tube cap is tightened securely.

9

N/A

10

10

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

Special Notes Caution

10. Using the red beaded pull tab carefully pull the fuse cartridge through the fuse tube against the spring tension until the contact fingers expand on the ring contact. 11. Slowly release pressure on the pull tab allowing the contact fingers to seat on the contact ring.

Avoid any jerking motion or excessive over travel when pulling through the fuse cartridge.

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

N/A

S & C FAULT TAMER

Doc Ref: WPS&CFaultTamer3

Special Notes Caution

12. Carefully remove the red beaded pull tab as shown.

12

F4

13 13

Operation Changing the HV Fuse Element

Special Notes Caution

13. Align the keyways on the fuse tube with the notches in the exhaust control device. 14. Insert the fuse tube into the exhaust control device and hand tighten the collar nut.

Ensure keyways and notches are aligned correctly prior to reassembling the Fault Tamer. Do not over tighten the collar nut.

14

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

S & C FAULT TAMER

S&C FAULT TAMER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPS&CFaultTamer4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

S & C SMD20 BORIC ACID DROP-OUT FUSES Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Manufacturer: S & C Model: SMD20 Boric Acid DOF Rating: 3 - 80 Amps Break Rating: Fuse: Fault, Opening: Load up to fuse rating Insulant: Air, Boric Acid

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution After removing the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuse assembly care should be taken prior to handling as the fuse unit may be hot. Note: If the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses are required as an isolation point they must be removed from the lower hinge fitting and stowed appropriately. These Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses use the standard S & C SMU 20 fuse elements. Ensure the correct fuse rating is selected prior to replacement.

Operation Options Opening - HV Operating Stick Closing - HV Operating Stick Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuse

C3

Special Notes Caution

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the Boric Acid DOF open / close operating eye hole as shown. 2. Raise the Boric Acid DOF and push firmly closed as shown. 3. Carefully remove the HV operating stick.

1

C3

Correct Latching

Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on the Boric Acid DOF lower hinged fitting during closing.

1

2

Operation Opening the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuse

1 2

Special Notes Caution Ensure the HV stick movement maintains pressure on the Boric Acid DOF lower hinged fitting during opening.

1. Place HV operating stick pin in the Boric Acid DOF open / close operating eye hole as shown. 2. Pull open the Boric Acid DOF in a smart and continuous motion to the fully lowered position. 3. Carefully remove the HV operating stick.

Operation Removing / Replacing the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuse

C3

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. With the Boric Acid DOF in the open position place the HV operating stick pin in the lower hinge fitting operating eye hole as shown. 2. Carefully lift the Boric Acid DOF out of hinge mechanism and remove. Reverse the above instruction to replace the Boric Acid DOF

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

S & C SMD20 BORIC ACID DROP-OUT FUSES

Doc Ref: WPS&CSMD20BoricAcidFuses1

Special Notes Caution Warning: The Boric Acid DOF may be hot. Exercise caution when handling.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

S & C SMD20 BORIC ACID DROP-OUT FUSES

S & C SMD20 BORIC ACID DROP-OUT FUSES Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPS&CSMD20BoricAcidFuses2

C4 D6 E7 Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses Removed

Operation Isolation Point - Removal of the HVDO Fuses If the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses are required as an isolation point they must be removed from the lower hinge fitting as shown and stowed appropriately. Refer to the Switching Operators Manual Section 8.8 for details if required.

Operation Changing the Fuse Element

N/A 2

1

1. Confirm the fuse element has blown by the protruding red indicator as shown. 2. Using the appropriate sized ring spanner loosen the upper and lower fuse fitting retaining bolts. Note: The upper fuse fitting clamp may require gentle prying using a screw driver to facilitate removal.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuses location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Warning: The Boric Acid DOF may be hot. Exercise caution when handling.

2

Operation Changing the Fuse Element

N/A 3

3. Slide both the upper and lower fuse fitting off the upper end of the fuse unit. 4. Discard the blown fuse unit. 5. Select a new fuse unit. Confirm the rating is correct.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the Boric Acid Drop-out Fuse location and labeling prior to any operation.

3

Operation Changing the Fuse Element

N/A

7 A

6. Slide the lower fuse fitting from the top down ensuring the fuse unit dimple aligns with the locating slot on the fuse fitting (Arrow A) 7. Tighten the lower fuse fitting retaining bolt. Do not over tighten.

6

N/A 9

8

Operation Changing the Fuse Element 8. Align the locating slot on the fuse unit with the upper fuse fitting internal alignment peg. 9. Slide the upper fuse fitting onto the fuse unit and tighten the retaining bolt. Do not over tighten.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the replacement fuse rating is correct prior to assembly. Do not over tighten the lower fuse fitting retaining bolt.

Special Notes Caution Do not over tighten the upper fuse fitting retaining bolt.

The fuse unit is now ready to be placed into service.

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

STANGER IN LINE LINKS Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Manufacturer: Stanger Model: In Line Links Rating: 250 Amps Break Rating: 50 Amps Insulant: Air Special Notes Caution When opening and closing the in line links ensure the HV operating stick movement DOES NOT cause the conductors to swing. Confirm the in line links have latched correctly prior to and after any operation. Note: Earth fault protection must be disabled prior to switching load or paralleling circuits using these single phase links.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the In Line Link

C3 D4 E7

1

Oil Levels

Special Notes Caution Confirm the in line link location prior to operation.

1. Place the HV operating stick pin in the in line link operating eye hole as shown. 2. Push firmly and in a controlled manner to the stop position to close in line link. 3. Confirm the in line link has latched correctly. 4. Carefully remove the HV operating stick.

2

Ensure the conductors do not swing during the closing operation.

Operation Confirming Latching

C3 D4 E7

1

Correct Latching

STANGER IN LINE LINKS

Doc Ref: WPStangerInLineLinks1

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the in line link has latched correctly as shown at the completion of the closing operation and prior to opening.

1

Operation Opening the In Line Link

C3 D4 E7

2

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the in line link arc chute is latched correctly. 2. Place the HV operating stick pin in the in line link operating eye hole as shown. 3. Pull the in line link in a firm and controlled manner fully open. 4. Carefully remove the HV operating stick.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the in line link location prior to operation. Ensure the conductors do not swing during the opening operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

STANGER IN LINE LINKS

STANGER IN LINE LINKS Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPStangerInLineLinks2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CAPACITOR CIRCUIT INTERLOCK Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

ABB Unigear ZS1 Capacitor Circuit Interlock N/A N/A N/A

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the capacitor circuit breaker and earth switch are fit for service prior to and after any operation. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker template in this manual for operating instructions on the circuit breaker. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch template in this manual for operating instructions on the earth switch. Note: The earth switch operating handle cannot be inserted until the capacitor circuit breaker has been opened for ten (10) minutes and is in the isolated position.

Operation Options Earthing

Interlock Key

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Access to the Capacitor Compound

D6 B2

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open and rack out the capacitor circuit breaker to the 'Isolated' position. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker template for operating instructions if required.

1

Operation Access to the Capacitor Compound

N/A

4

Status Indicators

Confirm the capacitor circuit breaker and earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution

3. Allow ten (10) minutes from the opening of the circuit breaker then... 4. ...insert the operating handle and close the capacitor earth switch. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch template for operating instructions if required.

Note: The earth switch operating handle cannot be inserted until the capacitor circuit breaker has been opened for ten (10) minutes and is in the isolated position.

4 G3

5

Operation Access to the Capacitor Compound

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CAPACITOR CIRCUIT INTERLOCK

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CapSW1

Special Notes Caution

5. Rotate the capacitor compound interlock key ACW and remove. Use this key to access the capacitor compound. Note: Removal of this key disables the circuit breaker racking mechanism.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CAPACITOR CIRCUIT INTERLOCK

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CAPACITOR CIRCUIT SWITCHING

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CapSW2

3

G3

Operation Restoring the Capacitor to Service 1. Confirm the capacitor is ready for service. 2. Lock the compound gate with the interlock key. 3. Insert the interlock key at the circuit breaker panel and rotate CW.

N/A

Operation Restoring the Capacitor to Service

4

4. ...insert the operating handle and open the capacitor earth switch. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch template for operating instructions if required.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the capacitor circuit breaker and earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the capacitor earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

4 4 Operation Restoring the Capacitor to Service

B2 D6

6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

5. Rack in and close the capacitor circuit breaker. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker template for operating instructions if required. 6. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position as shown.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the capacitor circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps 16 KA Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after any operation. The CB cubicle door can only be opened when the CB is in the fully racked out position. The CB cannot be racked out if closed. The CB cannot be racked in if the earth switch is closed. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch template in this manual for operating instructions on the earth switch. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 VT template in this manual for operating instructions on the VT. Remote operation of this CB is always the preferred method.

Operation Options Opening - Electric Closing - Electric Opening - Manual

Racking Spring Charge Shutters (Locking)

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

5

E1

Labeling

3

3

Operation Opening the CB - Local Electrical

Operation Opening the CB - Manually

F5 3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'AUTO' position. 3. Rotate the 'MECH OPERATION' lever ACW and hold and... 4. ...press the red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'AUTO' position as shown. 3. Rotate the 'C B CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker status green indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

2 1

3

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'AUTO' position as shown. 3. Confirm the operating spring is charged. 4. Rotate the 'C B CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. g 5. Confirm the circuit breaker status red indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

2

E1

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the CB - Local Electrical 1

4

Oil Levels

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 4

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CB2

Operation Opening the CB - Manually

F5

5. Gently rotate the 'MECH OPERATION' lever CW to the stop (vertical) position as shown. 6. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

5

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Operation Charging the CB Operating Spring - Manually

2

F2

1. Confirm the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch CW to the 'OFF' position. 3. Open the CB control circuits access door. 4. Switch off the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR' LV CB. 5. Open the CB cubicle access door.

4

Operation Charging the CB Operating Spring - Manually

B7

6

7

6. Confirm the operating spring is discharged. 7. Grasp the spring charge handle and lower / raise until the operating spring latches in the fully charged condition. 8. Confirm the spring charge mechanical indicator shows

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual charging of the operating spring should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution The operating spring can only be charged manually with the CB in the fully racked out position.

9. Close the CB cubicle access door. 10. Switch on the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR' LV CB. 11. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch ACW to the 'AUTO' position.

4

F6

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

ns

4

5

r 30 Tu

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'OFF' position. 4. Rotate the racking handle access cover knob ACW and insert the racking handle as shown. 5. Rotate the racking handle thirty (30) turns ACW until the handle spins free. The CB is now fully racked out.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

8

2 of 4

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

6. Remove the racking handle. 7. Open the CB cubicle access door. 8. Unlatch, unplug and carefully stow the CB auxiliary cable.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the CB is open prior to racking.

Special Notes Caution Take care when stowing the CB auxiliary plug. Avoid damage to the plug contact pins.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

9 9

10

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

10

9

Special Notes Caution

9. Push the CB racking trolley into position ensuring the racking trolley guide pins align with the CB cubicle. If required adjust the height of the racking trolley tray by the adjustment wheels (on either side) as shown. 10. Confirm the racking trolley has located correctly via the spring loaded latching lever moving to the position as shown.

Ensure the CB racking trolley is latched into position prior to withdrawing the CB from the CB cubicle.

9 Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution

11. Slide the two (2) CB latching handles inwards and pull the CB onto the racking trolley tray until the CB reaches the stop position.

Ensure the CB racking trolley is latched into position prior to withdrawing the CB from the CB cubicle.

11

11

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution

12. Confirm the CB latching pins have engaged with the racking trolley as shown. 13. Shift the spring loaded latching lever to the left and carefully move the racking trolley clear of the CB cubicle.

13

Ensure the CB racking trolley is latched into position prior to withdrawing the CB from the CB cubicle.

12 13

Operation Locking the Shutter(s)

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Identify shutter(s) (Busbars, Circuit) to be locked closed. 2. Attach padlock(s) at locking points as shown.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

4

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'OFF' position. 4 4. Push the CB racking trolley into position ensuring the racking trolley guide pins align with the CB cubicle. If required adjust the height of the racking trolley tray by the adjustment wheels (on either side) as shown.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CB3

Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation. Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

4 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 4

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1CB4

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

6 6 6

5

5. Confirm the racking trolley has located correctly via the spring loaded latching lever moving to the position as shown. 6. Slide the two (2) CB latching handles inwards and push the CB into the CB cubicle to the stop position.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the CB racking trolley is latched into position prior to pushing the CB into the CB cubicle.

5 N/A

7

7

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

Special Notes Caution

7. Confirm the CB has latched correctly and if in order... 8. ...shift the spring loaded latching lever to the left and carefully move the racking trolley clear of the CB cubicle.

8

N/A

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

9

9. Replace and latch closed the CB auxiliary cable plug box as shown. 10. Close the CB cubicle access door.

11

F6

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

11

rn 30 Tu

11. Rotate the racking handle access cover knob ACW and insert the racking handle as shown. 12. Rotate the racking handle thirty (30) turns ACW - and resistance is felt. The CB is now in the fully racked in (service) position. 13. Remove the racking handle.

s

12

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

E1

14

15

Special Notes Caution Note: If the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch is in the 'AUTO' position and the operating spring is discharged the spring charge motor will activate when the auxiliary cable plug box is inserted.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the CB is open prior to racking.

Special Notes Caution

14. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position as shown. 15. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE' switch ACW to the 'AUTO' position as shown. 16. Confirm the operating spring is charges correctly.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

16

4 of 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 EARTH SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch Fault Current Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the earth switch is fit for service prior to and after any operation. The earth switch cannot be closed until the CB is in the fully racked out position. The CB cannot be racked in if the earth switch is closed. The earth switch cubicle door cannot be opened unless the earth switch is closed. The earth switch cannot be opened when the earth switch cubicle door is open. Note: The bus coupler earth switch may have additonal electrical interlocks fitted. Confirm prior to any operation. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker template in this manual for operating instructions on the circuit breaker. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 VT template in this manual for operating instructions on the VT.

Operation Options Opening / Closing - Manual

Earthing

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

G1

1. Confirm the relevant circuit breaker is racked out with the racking handle removed. 2. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' via the neon indicators

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C6

3. Unlock and open the earth switch operating mechanism access cover. 3

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C6

4

4. Press down the earth switch operating mechanism spring loaded interlock as shown and insert the operating handle as shown.

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Labeling

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 EARTH SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1ES1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 EARTH SWITCH

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 EARTH SWITCH Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1ES2

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

C6

7

5. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. 6. Remove the operating handle. 7. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows i 8. Close the earth switch operating mechanism access cover and padlock if required.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

5 Operation Closing the Earth Switch

F2

9. Confirm the mechanical indicator inside the earth switch cubicle shows A torch may be required to view the mechanical indicator.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

9

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

C6

2

1. Unlock the padlock (if fitted) and open the earth switch operating mechanism access cover as shown. 2. Confirm the earth switch operating mechanism spring loaded interlock is in the fully lowered position as shown.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

1

C6

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

4

3. Insert the operating handle as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to open the earth switch. 5. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

7. Close and padlock the earth switch operating mechanism access cover.

6 3

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

F2

Special Notes Caution

8. Confirm the mechanical indicator inside the earth switch cubicle shows A torch may be required to view the mechanical indicator.

8

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 TRANSFORMER SWITCH / EARTH SWITCH / HV FUSES Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Manufacturer: ABB Model: Unigear ZS1 Transformer Switch Earth Switch / HV Fuses Break Rating: 80 Amps Insulant: Air Special Notes Caution Ensure the transformer switch / earth switch are fit for service prior to and after any operation. The transformer switch must be opened before the earth switch can be operated. The transformer earth switch must be closed before the transformer HV fuse cubicle door can be opened.

Operation Options Trans Switch - Manual Open / Close Earth Switch - Manual Open / Close HV Fuses Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Transformer Switch

F2

3

Oil Levels

2

1

1

2

1. Rotate the access cover CW and insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 2. Rotate operating handle CW to the stop position to open the switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 6. Visually confirm the switch status via the viewing port.

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the access cover CW and insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 2. Rotate operating handle CW to the stop position to charge the operating spring then... 3. ...rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position to close the switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 6. Visually confirm the switch status via the viewing port.

Operation Opening the Transformer Switch

F2

Status Indicators

Confirm the transformer switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 TRANSFORMER SWITCH / EARTH SWITCH / HV FUSES

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1TransSwitch1

1 N/A

Operation Closing the Transformer Earth Switch 1. Confirm the relevant transformer switch is open. 2. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' via the neon indicators

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 TRANSFORMER SWITCH / EARTH SWITCH / HV FUSES

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 TRANSFORMER SWITCH / EARTH SWITCH / HV FUSES

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1TransSwitch2

Operation Closing the Transformer Earth Switch

N/A

4

3. Rotate the access cover CW and insert the operating handle into earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle CW to the stop position to close the earth switch. 5. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 7. Visually confirm the earth switch status via the viewing port.

3

3

7

Operation Opening the Transformer Earth Switch

N/A

2 1

1

5

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the access cover CW and insert the operating handle into earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 2. Rotate the operating handle ACW to the stop position as shown to open the earth switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 5. Visually confirm the earth switch status via the viewing port.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the transformer earth switch location and labeling prior to any operation.

4 Operation Access to the HV Fuses

E7

4

1. Confirm the transformer earth switch is closed. 2. Open the HV fuses cubicle door. 3. Carefully remove the required HV fuse from the retaining clips. 4. Insert the replacement HV fuse into the retaining clips ensuring the striker pin is on the top contact. 5. Close the HV fuses cubicle door.

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 VT

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ABB Unigear ZS1 VT N/A Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the VT is fit for service prior to and after any operation. The relevant circuit breaker must be racked out to the 'Isolated' position and the earth switch closed before the VT cubicle door can be opened. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Circuit Breaker template in this manual for operating instructions on the circuit breaker. Refer to the ABB Unigear ZS1 Earth Switch template in this manual for operating instructions on the earth switch. Note: These VTs are only fitted to the transformer circuit breakers.

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 VT

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1VT1

Operation Options Racking Auxiliary Plug / Cable

HV Fuses

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Operation Racking out the VT

E8 C6

4

4

4

A8 E8

Oil Levels

7

7

6

6

1. Confirm the relevant circuit breaker is racked out with the racking handle removed. 2. Confirm the relevant earth switch is closed. 3. Open the VT cubicle access door. 4. Remove and stow the VT auxiliary cable as shown.

Operation Racking out the VT 5. Align the racking ramp with the VT cubicle as shown. 6. Rotate and raise (spring assisted) the two (2) VT locating pins. 7. Grasp the racking handles and carefully withdraw the VT from the VT cubicle.

Operation Changing the VT HV Fuses

N/A

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the VT is fully racked out of the VT cubicle. 2. Twist and withdraw the required HV fuse from the fuse housing.

Exercise caution when handling HV fuses as they may be hot.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 VT

ABB UNIGEAR ZS1 VT Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPABBUnigearZS1VT2

Operation Changing the VT HV Fuses

N/A

3

1. Confirm all three VT HV fuses are correctly placed in the fuse housings. 2. Align the racking ramp with the VT cubicle as shown.

Operation Racking In the VT

A8 E8

4 6

2 of 2

3. Remove the HV fuse contact cap as shown. 4. Place the contact cap on the replacement HV fuse. 5. Insert the HV fuse into the fuse housing.

Operation Racking In the VT

N/A

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

3. Push the VT into the VT cubicle to the stop position. 4. Push down and rotate / latch the two (2) VT locating pins as shown. 5. Remove the racking ramp. 6. Replace and VT auxiliary cable as shown. 7. Close the VT cubicle access door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure both VT locating pins are latched in the lowered position.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM GL107 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ALSTOM GL107 Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

C5 G7

2

4

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. Rotate the control switch to the 'LOCAL' position. Confirm the operating spring is charged. Press the green 'I' button to close the circuit breaker. Confirm the operating spring charging has initiated. If required rotate the control switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 7. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

C5 G7

2

3

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. Rotate the control switch to the 'LOCAL' position. Press the red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. If required rotate the control switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

C5 G7

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. Rotate the control switch to the 'LOCAL' position. Confirm the operating spring is charged. Rotate the manual operating switch 'I' CW to close the circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the operating spring charging has initiated. 6. If required rotate the control switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 7. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker operating spring is charged prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 4, G 7 in the main picture.

ALSTOM GL107 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPAlstomGL107CB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 4, G 7 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker operating spring is charged prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 4, G 7 in the main picture. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ALSTOM GL107 CIRCUIT BREAKER

ALSTOM GL107 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomGL107CB2

Operation

C5 G7

3

Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Rotate the manual operating switch 'I' CW to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation

C5 G7

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring 3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 4, G 7 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the charging mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the spring charge handle CW until the operating spring is fully charged (latched). 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. Rotate the control switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 7. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Confirm the operating spring status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 4, G 7 in the main picture.

ALSTOM HWX BUSBAR EARTH SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom HWX Busbar Earth Switch Fault Current Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the busbar earth switch is fit for service prior to and after operation. Ensure all circuit breakers are isolated from the relevant bus section before closing the busbar earth switch.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm D2

3

6

1. Perform a 'safe to earth test'. 2. Unlock and move the busbar earth switch interlock lever across and relock. 3. Attach the earth switch operating handle as shown (red shading). 4. Lower the earth switch operating handle to the stop position to close the busbar earth switch. 5. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required.

Operation Opening the Busbar Earth Switch

2 3 4

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Busbar Earth Switch

2 4

D2

Oil Levels

7

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. If required unlock the busbar earth switch. 2. Unlock and move the busbar earth switch interlock lever across and relock. 3. Attach the earth switch operating handle as shown (green shading). 4. Raise the earth switch operating handle smartly to the stop position to open the busbar earth switch. 6. Remove the operating handle. Lock if required.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the busbar earth switch location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the busbar earth switch status arrow 6.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the busbar earth switch location and labeling prior to operation.

ALSTOM HWX BUSBAR EARTH SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXBusbarESW1

Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the busbar earth switch status arrow 7.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

ALSTOM HWX BUSBAR EARTH SWITCH

ALSTOM HWX BUSBAR EARTH SWITCH Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXBusbarESW2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ALSTOM HWX Circuit Breaker 2500 Amps Fault Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation. Note: The circuit breaker cubicle door affects the fault rating of the switchgear and must be closed and latched correctly unless operating locally manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Switch Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing / Opening CB - Local Electrically

C3 D3

32

1

N/A

3 N/A

4 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position to close the circuit breaker. 3. Rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator and indicating lights agree with the circuit breaker status.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. Stand to one side and push the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator and indicating lights agree with the circuit breaker status. 6. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manually

Special Notes Caution

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXCB1

Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

At the completion of the operation ensure the circuit breaker cubicle door is closed and latched correctly.

1. Rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker operating spring is charged correctly via the mechanical indicator. 4. Stand to one side and push the green 'PUSH TO CLOSE' button to close the circuit breaker. 5. If required rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'REMOTE' position. 6. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Confirm the mechanical indicator and indicating lights agree with the circuit breaker status. 1 of 3

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

N/A

5

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXCB2

4 7 5

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet and isolate the spring charge motor. 4. Insert the spring charge handle into the charging mechanism. 5. Ratchet the spring charge handle ACW 90 degrees app. 5 times then CW app. 5 degrees to latch the spring.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

Special Notes Caution

6. Remove the spring charge handle. 7. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet and de-isolate the spring charge motor. 8. If required close and latch the cubicle door and rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'REMOTE' position.

9

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

4

1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'LOCAL' position. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. Simultaneously push the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button and rotate the interlock switch CW to the 'FREE' position 5. Unlock and relock the racking mechanism access cover in the open position. 6. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

5 4

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

7

7. Insert the racking handle in the cubicle door racking mechanism access hole. 8. Rotate the racking handle ACW until it spins free. 9. Remove the racking handle and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 10. If required: Withdraw the circuit breaker to the 'ISOLATED' position and rotate the interlock switch to the 'LOCKED' position: Or: Withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle.

8 10

Operation Locking / Unlocking Shutter(s)

N/A

1 2 1

2 of 3

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Locking shutter(s) 1. Identify shutter(s) to be locked closed. 2. Lock the shutter(s) mechanism(s) with a padlock as shown. Unlocking shutter(s) 4. Unlock and remove the padlock from the shutter(s) mechanism(s).

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 'CHARGED' Arrow 9.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. If leaving the circuit breaker in the 'ISOLATED' position ensure the cubicle door is closed and latched correctly.

Special Notes Caution Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER

N/A

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

4

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open and the racking mechanism access cover is locked open. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. If the circuit breaker is in the 'ISOLATED' position rotate the interlock switch to the 'FREE' position and / or: 4. Push the circuit breaker into the 'SERVICE POSITION'. 5. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 6. Insert the racking handle in the cubicle door racking mechanism access hole.

6

3

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

10

9

Operation Confirming the Circuit is Safe To Earth

D2

Operation Closing the Circuit Earthing Switch

N/A

2

3

5

2 4

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Rack out the relevant circuit breaker and withdraw from the circuit breaker cubicle. 2. Attach the earth switch operating handle to the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to close the circuit earth switch. 4. Remove the operating handle. Lock off if required. 5. Confirm the circuit earth switch has closed correctly via the viewing window in the circuit breaker cubicle.

Ensure the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to earthing.

Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior earthing. Ensure the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to earthing.

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock if required and attach the earth switch operating handle to the operating mechanism as shown. 2. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to open the circuit earth switch. 3. Remove the operating handle. Lock off if required. 4. Confirm the circuit earth switch has opened correctly via the viewing window in the circuit breaker cubicle.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

Operation Opening the Circuit Earthing Switch

N/A

Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the relevant 'CABLES ALIVE' voltage indication lights show the circuit is de-energised.

1

Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

7. Rotate the racking handle CW to the stop position. 8. Remove the racking handle and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 9. Rotate the interlock switch ACW to the 'LOCKED' position. 10. Unlock and relock the racking mechanism access cover in the closed position as shown. 11. If required close and latch the cubicle door and rotate the SELECTOR switch to the 'REMOTE' position.

7

Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXCB3

Confirm the circuit earth switch location and labeling prior earthing.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER

ALSTOM HWX CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXCB4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALSTOM HWX RACKABLE VT Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Alstom HWX Rackable VT N/A N/A Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the VT is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: There are two types of HWX VT: • Rackable - located on top of the bus bar cubicle. • Fixed - located in the cable section of the circuit breaker cubicle. This template covers the rackable VT only.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

LV De-ion Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm F3 F7

1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Isolating the VT - Access to the VT HV fuses

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Switch off the VT LV MCB at the rear of the VT as shown. 2. Unlock and withdraw the VT interlock bar.

Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operation.

ALSTOM HWX RACKABLE VT

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXVT1

2

B2

3

N/A

1 1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Isolating the VT - Access to the VT HV fuses

Special Notes Caution

3. Grasp the VT isolating handles and raise the VT to the stop position. 4. Lock the VT shutters in the closed position and the VT in the upright position.

Operation Changing the VT HV Fuses 1. Unscrew the HV fuse retaining cap and remove as shown. 2. Remove the HV fuse. 3. Replace the HV fuse. 4. Re-attach the HV fuse retaining cap.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operation. If handling the VT HV fuses exercise caution as they may be hot.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ALSTOM HWX RACKABLE VT

ALSTOM HWX RACKABLE VT

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPAlstomHWXVT2

F3 F7

4

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation De-isolating the VT 1. Unlock the VT and VT shutters. 2. Using the VT isolating handles carefully lower the VT to the stop position. 3. Push in the VT interlock bar to the stop position and lock. 4. Switch on the VT LV MCB at the rear of the VT.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ASEA HLC 36-52/1250 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

ASEA HLC 36-52/1250 Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. There is no manual close option on this circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

A6

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Press the green 'CLOSE' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

2

3

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

A6

2

3

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Press the red 'TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

B6

1

1. Unlock if required and press the 'O' button on the outside of the control cabinet to open the circuit breaker.

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating light. Refer to A 5 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating light. Refer to A 5 in the main picture.

ASEA HLC 36-52/1250 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPASEAHLC36-521250CB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating light. Refer to A 5 in the main picture.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ASEA HLC 36-52/1250 CIRCUIT BREAKER

ASEA HLC 36-52/1250 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPASEAHLC36-521250CB2

Operation

A6

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Press the MOTOR VOLTAGE red 'OFF' button to isolate the spring charge motor.

3

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the spring charge motor is isolated prior to manually charging the operating spring.

A6

4

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

4. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the spring charge handle in the required direction until the spring latches in the charged position. Remove the handle. 6. Press the MOTOR VOLTAGE black 'RESET' button to de-isolate the spring charge motor. 7. Rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 8. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

At the completion of the manual spring charge de-isolate the spring charge motor.

EMAIL J18 SOLENOID CB Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

EMAIL J18 Solenoid CB 800 Amps 26 KA Oil

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote / local electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B3

21

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

2

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. 2. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation.

G4 G7

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. Pull the 'PULL TO LOCK CLOSED' pin to close the circuit breaker. 3. Press the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required close the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 5. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

3

3

5

4 7

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing / Opening the CB - Local Electrical

Operation Closing / Opening the CB - Local Manual

F5

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation. Electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Special Notes Caution

Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. Withdraw the interlock pin. Raise the racking handle mechanism interlock. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. Rotate the racking handle CW until the CB reaches the fully lowered position. Remove the racking handle. 7. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the left. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

EMAIL J18 SOLENOID CB

Doc Ref: WPEmailJ18SolCB1

Confirm the circuit breaker is open prior to racking.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

EMAIL J18 SOLENOID CB

EMAIL J18 SOLENOID CB Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPEmailJ18SolCB2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

F2

8. Grasp the circuit breaker racking handle as shown and withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle.

8

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

E2 G2

9. If required unscrew the retaining wing nuts and remove the circuit breaker plug box.

Special Notes Caution Withdraw the circuit breaker with care. If resistance is encountered stop and investigate.

Special Notes Caution Stow the plug box ensuring electrical contacts are not exposed possible damage.

9 9

N/A

2

Operation Locking the Shutters 1. Identify the required shutter(s) to be locked. 2. Place lock(s) as shown.

2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the required shutters prior to locking

2

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

F4 F2 5

1

F4 G7

10 8

7

6

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open and in the fully lowered position, interlock pin withdraw. 2. Confirm all required shutters are unlocked. 3. If required insert the CB plug box and tighten the retaining wing nuts. 4. If required confirm the required CB location - front or rear busbars. 5. Using the racking handle push the CB into the CB cubicle to the required position.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker 6. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the right. 7. Raise the racking handle mechanism interlock. 8. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. 9. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the CB reaches the fully raised, service position. Remove the racking handle. 10. Push in the interlock pin. 11. If required close the cubicle access door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the required shutters are unlocked prior to racking in the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution Slight adjustment of the racking handle, up or down, may be required to allow the interlock pin to be pushed in.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

EMAIL J22 SOLENOID CB Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

EMAIL J22 Solenoid CB 1600 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote / local electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B3

21

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

2

3

F5 G6

3 5

4 7

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing / Opening the CB - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. 2. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation.

Operation Closing / Opening the CB - Local Manual

F5

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. Pull the 'PULL TO LOCK CLOSED' pin to close the circuit breaker. 3. Press the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required close the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 5. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation. Electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Special Notes Caution

Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. Withdraw the interlock pin. Raise the racking handle mechanism interlock. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. Rotate the racking handle CW until the CB reaches the fully lowered position. Remove the racking handle. 7. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the left. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

EMAIL J22 SOLENOID CB

Doc Ref: WPEmailJ22SolCB1

Confirm the circuit breaker is open prior to racking.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

EMAIL J22 SOLENOID CB

EMAIL J22 SOLENOID CB Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPEmailJ22SolCB2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

E2 G2

8

8

8. Grasp the circuit breaker racking handles as shown and withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

E2 G2

9. If required unscrew the retaining wing nuts and remove the circuit breaker plug box.

Special Notes Caution Withdraw the circuit breaker with care. If resistance is encountered stop and investigate.

Special Notes Caution Stow the plug box ensuring electrical contacts are not exposed possible damage.

9 9

N/A

2

Operation Locking the Shutters 1. Identify the required shutter(s) to be locked. 2. Place lock(s) as shown.

2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the required shutters prior to locking

2

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

E2 G2

5

5

F5 G6

10

8

7

6

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open and in the fully lowered position, interlock pin withdraw. 2. Confirm all required shutters are unlocked. 3. If required insert the CB plug box and tighten the retaining wing nuts. 4. If required confirm the required CB location - front or rear busbars. 5. Using the racking handles push the CB into the CB cubicle to the required position.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker 6. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the right. 7. Raise the racking handle mechanism interlock. 8. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. 9. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the CB reaches the fully raised, service position. Remove the racking handle. 10. Push in the interlock pin. 11. If required close the cubicle access door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the required shutters are unlocked prior to racking in the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution Slight adjustment of the racking handle, up or down, may be required to allow the interlock pin to be pushed in.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OKW3 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

English Electric OKW3 Circuit Breaker 800 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm G5

2

3

G5

2

3

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

6 3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control selector switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker operating switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control selector switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker operating switch ACW to the 'OPEN' position to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

G5

Labeling

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control selector switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Insert the operating handle into the 'CLOSE' operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle CW to close the circuit breaker. Remove the operating handle. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. Close the control cabinet door. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 4 in the main picture.

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 4 in the main picture.

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OKW3 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPEnglishElectricOKW3CB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 6). Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OKW3 CIRCUIT BREAKER

ENGLISH ELECTRIC OKW3 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPEnglishElectricOKW3CB2

Operation

G5

Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 3

6

4

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control selector switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Insert the operating handle into the 'OPEN' operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle ACW to open the circuit breaker. Remove the operating handle. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. Close the control cabinet door.

Operation

G5

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control selector switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Withdraw the spring charge motor fuse.

2

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 6).

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

3

Operation

G5

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

5 9

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

4. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge operating mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the spring charge handle ACW to the stop position to charge the spring. Remove the handle. 6. Re-install the spring charge motor fuse. 7. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 8. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the spring status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 9).

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GEC Alsthom SBV 24 Circuit Breaker 800 - 1250 Amps 16 KA Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Operation Options Opening - Electric Closing - Electric Opening - Manual Closing - Manual

Spring Charge LV Fuses Racking Shutters

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the CB - Local Electrical

F3

4

3

Oil Levels

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position as shown. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged. 3. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker status red indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

1

2

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Operation Opening the CB - Local Electrical

F3

3

2

F6

Operation Closing the CB - Manually

4

3

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position as shown. 2. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker status green indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

1

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged. 3. Press the 'CLOSE' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval. 1 of 3

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

F6

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24CB2

3

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Press the 'TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

2

H2

2

Operation Charging the CB Operating Spring - Manually 1. Open the circuit breaker control circuits access door. 2. Remove the 'F1 MOTOR' LV fuse. Caution - The LV fuses are non-standard. The live side is on the bottom.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Caution - The LV fuses are non-standard. The live side is on the bottom.

G8

Operation Charging the CB Operating Spring - Manually

6 4 3

3. Insert the spring charge handle into the charge mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the spring charge handle CW to the stop position (app. one full turn) to charge the operating spring. 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 7. Replace the 'F1 MOTOR' LV fuse.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

G4

3

D8

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Rotate the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' CW to the 'FREE' position.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

4

5

2 of 3

Operation Opening the CB - Manually

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to close the circuit breaker with the spring charge handle inserted.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

4. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the racking handle ACW to the stop position to rack out the CB carriage. 6. Remove the racking handle.

Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

F6 H7

Special Notes Caution

7. Grasp the racking handles and carefully withdraw the circuit breaker from the circuit breaker cubicle.

7

Exercise caution when withdrawing the circuit breaker as they are top heavy.

7

Operation Locking the Shutter(s)

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Identify shutter(s) (Busbars, Circuit) to be locked closed. 2. Insert padlock(s) where shown.

Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Note: To lock the shutters open refer to the Locking the Shutters Open instruction in the GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK template in this manual.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

F6 H7

5

1

D9

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER MODE SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the shutter(s) have been unlocked. 4. Confirm the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' CW is in the 'FREE' position. 5. Grasp the racking handles and carefully push the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker cubicle to the stop position as shown.

5

4

Special Notes Caution

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

6

G4

9

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker 9. Rotate the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' CW to the 'LOCKED' position as shown.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

6. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism as shown. 7. Rotate the racking handle CW to the stop position to rack in the CB carriage. 8. Remove the racking handle.

7

Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24CB3

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to operate the circuit breaker until the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' is in the locked position.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24CB4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GEC Alsthom SBV 24 Earth Truck N/A Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Ensure the earth truck is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Confirm the earth truck is set for the correct earthing application - Bus Bar Earth or Circuit Earth - prior to racking in.

Operation Options Opening - Manual Closing - Manual

Spring Charge Racking

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Setting the Earth Truck - Bus Bar Earth

N/A

3 ACW app.116 Turns

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Insert the earth truck setting raise / lower handle as shown. 2. Rotate the raise / lower handle ACW to the stop position (app. 116 turns) 3. Confirm the indicator points to the 'UPPER BUSBARS' position. 4. Remove the raise / lower handle.

Confirm the earth truck contacts have reached the correct position via the 'UPPER BUSBARS' indicator.

1 Operation Setting the Earth Truck - Circuit Earth

N/A

3 CW app.116 Turns

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24ET1

Special Notes Caution

1. Insert the earth truck setting raise / lower handle as shown. 2. Rotate the raise / lower handle CW to the stop position (app. 116 turns) 3. Confirm the indicator points to the 'LOWER BUSBARS' position. 4. Remove the raise / lower handle.

Confirm the earth truck contacts have reached the correct position via the 'LOWER BUSBARS' indicator.

1

Operation Opening the Required Shutters

N/A

2 2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

1. Identify the required shutters. (Circuit shutters are shown in the photograph) 2. Raise the shutter operating mechanism lever and insert the supplied holding latch as shown. 3. Perform a 'Safe To Earth' test on the required ciruit with an approved testing device.

Ensure the correct identification of shutters prior to opening.

Note: To close the shutters reverse the instruction point 2.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24ET2

Operation Racking In the Earth Truck

C4 G4

1. Confirm the earth truck is set for the required earth position - Bus Bar Earth or Circuit Earth. 2. Confirm the relevant shutters are open. 3. Confirm the earth switch is open. 4. Confirm the earth truck 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' is in the 'FREE' position. 5. Grasp the racking handles and carefully push the earth truck into the circuit breaker cubicle to the stop position as shown.

5 5

4

E8

Operation Racking In the Earth Truck

6

6. Insert the racking handle into the earth truck racking mechanism as shown. 7. Rotate the racking handle CW to the stop position to rack in the earth truck. 8. Remove the racking handle.

7

E1

9

D7

5

3 2

D6

3

Operation Racking In the Earth Truck 9. Rotate the earth truck 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' ACW to the 'LOCKED' position.

Operation Charging the Earth Truck Operating Spring 1. Confirm the spring charge mechanism position - Bus Bar Earth or Circuit Earth. Photograph shows the earth switch in the Circuit Earth position. 2. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the spring charge handle CW to the stop position (app. one full turn) to charge the operating spring. 4. Remove the spring charge handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows (Charged)

Operation Closing the Earth Switch 1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the earth switch operating spring is charged. Push the 'CLOSE' button to close the earth switch. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows (ON) If required attach a padlock to the earth switch 'TRIP' button.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth truck is set for the correct earthing application - Bus Bar Earth or Circuit Earth - prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to operate the earth switch until the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' is in the locked position.

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to close the earth switch with the spring charge handle inserted.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated prior to closing the earth switch.

2

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK

D6

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

3

Special Notes Caution

1. If required unlock and remove the padlock from the earth switch 'TRIP' button. 2. Push the 'TRIP' button to open the earth switch. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows (OFF)

2

Confirm the location and labeling of the earth truck prior to operation.

Operation Racking Out the Earth Truck

E1

2

E8

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the earth switch is open. 2. Rotate the earth truck 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' CW to the 'FREE' position.

Operation Racking Out the Earth Truck

3

Special Notes Caution

3. Insert the racking handle into the earth truck racking mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the racking handle ACW to the stop position to rack out the earth truck. 5. Remove the racking handle.

4

Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

Operation Racking Out the Earth Truck

C4 G4

Special Notes Caution

6. Grasp the racking handles and carefully withdraw the earth truck from the circuit breaker cubicle.

6

If the earth truck is set to the Bus Bar Earth position exercise caution when withdrawing as it will be top heavy.

6

F1

2

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the location and labeling of the earth truck prior to operation.

Operation Capacitor Bank Earthing - Castel Key Release

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the earth truck capacitor bank (Circuit Earth) switch is closed. 2. Push up and rotate the Castel Key interlock pin. 3. Open the circuit breaker control circuits access door. 4. Remove the capacitor bank access Castel Key. Warning: The earth truck cannot be removed until the Castel Key is returned to the captive position and the earth truck Castel Key interlock pin is released and in the lowered position as shown.

The earth truck must be racked in and the 'CARRIAGE INTERLOCK' in the 'LOCKED' position before the Castel Key interlock pin can be engaged.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24ET3

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK

GEC ALSTHOM SBV 24 EARTH TRUCK Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPGECAlsthomSBV24ET4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC D4XD CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GEC D4XD Circuit Breaker 400 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Note: Local electrical trip is always the preferred method of opening this circuit breaker. This circuit breaker can only be closed manually. This circuit breaker can be used to earth the circuit.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Via CB Auto Reclose Shutters O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm F1

1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrically 1. Rotate the O.C.B TRIP switch to the 'TRIP' position to open the circuit breaker. 2. Confirm the indication lights and mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

GEC D4XD CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPGECD4XDCB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Local electrical operation is the preferred method of opening the circuit breaker.

D4

1

2

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the mechanical trip button access cover to reveal the trip button. 2. Press the red 'TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the indication lights and mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

F3

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Unlock if required and raise the circuit breaker ISOLATING MECHANISM interlock pin locking mechanism. 3. Slide the interlock pin across to the 'FREE' position.

3

Local electrical operation is the preferred method of opening the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking out.

2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

GEC D4XD CIRCUIT BREAKER

GEC D4XD CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPGECD4XDCB2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

F6

4. Attach the circuit breaker racking handle to the racking mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the circuit breaker reaches the 'ISOLATED' position. 6. Remove the racking handle. 7. Withdraw the circuit breaker from the circuit breaker cubicle.

4

5

Operation Locking the Shutters as Required

N/A

1. Identify the shutters to be locked. 2. Lock the required shutters as shown.

1 2 1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the correct identification of the shutters prior to locking.

Operation Racking In The Circuit Breaker

F4

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Confirm the shutters are unlocked. Push the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker cubicle. Attach the circuit breaker racking handle as shown. Rotate the racking handle CW until the circuit breaker reaches the 'PLUGGED IN' position. 6. Remove the racking handle. 7. Slide the interlock pin across to the 'LOCKED' position and lock if required.

4 5

Operation Charging the Spring - Closing the CB - Manually

E6

1 1

3

1. Raise the spring charge handle to the stop (latched) position to charge the operating spring. Lower the handle to the stop position as shown. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged via the mechanical indicator. 3. Pull across the closing mechanism interlock and push spring charge handle to the stop position as shown to close the circuit breaker.

Operation Earthing the Circuit Via the Circuit Breaker

N/A

3 2

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Withdraw the circuit breaker from the circuit breaker cubicle. 2. Unlock and move the LOCATION SELECTOR to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position. 3. Push the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker cubicle and confirm alignment to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position as shown. 4. Rack up the circuit breaker and close, as per previous instructions, to earth the circuit.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker switch location and labeling prior to operation. Note: sliding the interlock pin across may required some minor adjustment of the circuit breaker 'PLUGGED IN' position.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker switch location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the indication lights and mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker switch location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to earthing.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GEC OX36 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GEC OX36 Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps 25 kA SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote operation of the circuit breaker is always the preferred method. Note: This circuit breaker is equipped with a low SF6 gas pressure interlock. The circuit breaker cannot be operated if the SF6 gas pressure is too low.

Operation Options Opening / Closing - Remote Opening / Closing - Local Electrical Opening / Closing - Manual Manual Spring Charge Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

C4

4

1. 2. 3. 4.

27

5. 6. 7. 8.

C4

3

25

C4

6

3,5

4 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

Raise open the local control cabinet door. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. Confirm the operating spring is charged. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position to close the circuit breaker. Confirm the operating spring charges. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position. Lower the local control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Raise open the local control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position to open the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 5. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position. 6. Lower the local control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Raise open the local control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the operating spring is charged. 4. Press the green 'CLOSE' button to close the circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the operating spring charges. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 7. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position. 8. Lower the local control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

GEC OX36 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPGECOX36CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation of the circuit breaker should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

GEC OX36 CIRCUIT BREAKER

GEC OX36 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPGECOX36CB2

C4

4 3

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Manually 1. Raise open the local control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Press the red 'TRIP' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 5. Rotate the 'SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position. 6. Lower the local control cabinet door.

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

C4

1. Confirm the 'SELECTOR' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Remove the spring charge 'F1 L MOTOR' LV fuse.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation of the circuit breaker should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual charging of the operation spring should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

2 C4

4 3 4

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

Special Notes Caution

3. Raise the spring charge mechanism access cover and insert the spring charge handle as shown. 4. Raise / lower the spring charge handle until the mechanical indicator shows 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. Replace the spring charge 'F1 L MOTOR' LV fuse.

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

INOUE DENKI 30TE0150RS CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Inoue Denki 30TE0150RS Circuit Breaker 800 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. There is no local manual close option for this circuit breaker

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm B3

2

3

B3

2

3

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Press the red CIRCUIT BREAKER CLOSE button to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to B 7, C 2 in the main picture.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Press the black CIRCUIT BREAKER OPEN button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

B5

Labeling

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the OFF position. 3. Pull down the red manual open mechanism as shown to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the CIRCUIT BREAKER control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to B 7, C 2 in the main picture.

INOUE DENKI 30TE0150RS CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPInoueDenki30TE0150RSCB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to B 7, C 2 in the main picture. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

INOUE DENKI 30TE0150RS CIRCUIT BREAKER

INOUE DENKI 30TE0150RS CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPInoueDenki30TE0150RSCB2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Magrini Galileo 38 MGE 1000 BM Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. Manual opening and closing of this circuit breaker is to be only used in emergency situations. Mechanism damage can occur if the operating lever is turned the wrong way.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

3

C5

3 1 2

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Status Indicators

Operation Access to the Circuit Breaker Local Controls

Special Notes Caution

1. Carefully raise the circuit breaker local controls access panel. 2. Place the support strut in position as shown. 3. If required remove the access panel from the hinge position as shown and stow away from the circuit breaker.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior opening the access cover. Exercise caution if removing the access panel.

2

C5

Operation

2

Opening / Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

3

C5

4

45

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Open the circuit breaker local controls access panel. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'L' position. 3. Raise the access cover and press the black 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. Raise the access cover and press the black 'I' button to close the circuit breaker. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 6. Close the circuit breaker local controls access panel.

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 6 in the main picture.

Operation

Special Notes Caution

Opening / Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the circuit breaker local controls access panel. Rotate the control switch to the 'L' position. If required unlock the manual control lock. Rotate the manual control switch ACW to the 'O' button position to open the circuit breaker. Relock if required. 5. Rotate the manual control switch ACW to the 'I' button position to close the circuit breaker. Relock if required. 6. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 7. Close the circuit breaker local controls access panel. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPMagriniScarpa38MGE1000BMCB1

Manual closing / opening to be used in emergencies only. Mechanism damage can occur if the operating lever is turned the wrong way.Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 6 in the main picture.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM CIRCUIT BREAKER

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMagriniScarpa38MGE1000BMCB2

Operation

C5

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring 1. Open the circuit breaker local controls access panel. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'L' position. 3. Remove the spring charge motor supply LV fuse.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

3

C5

Operation

10

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

5 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

4. Insert the spring charge handle into the charging mechanism as shown. 5. Move the spring charge handle to and fro (ratchet) until the operating spring is fully charged (latched). 6. Remove the spring charge handle. 7. Re-install the spring charge motor supply LV fuse. 8. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 9. Close the circuit breaker local controls access panel.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Confirm the operating spring status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 10).

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM20 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Magrini Galileo 38 MGE 1000 BM20 Circuit Breaker 1250 Amps Fault Oil

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. Manual opening and closing of this circuit breaker is to be only used in emergency situations. Mechanism damage can occur if the operating lever is turned the wrong way.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm G6

2

3

G6

2 3

G6

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Status Indicators

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'L' position. 3. Raise the access cover and press the black 'I' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'L' position. 3. Raise the access cover and press the black 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'O' position. 3. Rotate the manual operating switch to the right (I) to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 6 in the main picture.

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 6 in the main picture.

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPMagriniGalileo38MGE1000BM20CB1

Special Notes Caution Manual closing to be used in emergencies only. Mechanism damage can occur if the operating lever is turned the wrong way. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 6 in the main picture. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

MAGRINI GALILEO 38 MGE 1000 BM20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMagriniGalileo38MGE1000BM20CB2

Operation

G6

Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

3

G6

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'O' position. 3. Rotate the manual operating switch to the left (O) to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation

8

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring 3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Manual opening to be used in emergencies only. Mechanism damage can occur if the operating lever is turned the wrong way. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 6 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the control switch to the 'O' position. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the charging mechanism as shown. 4. Move the spring charge handle to and fro (ratchet) until the operating spring is fully charged (latched). 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. If required rotate the control switch to the 'D' position. 7. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Confirm the operating spring status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 8).

MAGRINI SCARPA E MAGNANO MMS24C CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Magrini Scarpa E Magnano MMS24C Circuit Breaker 1000 Amps Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm N/A

2

2 3

N/A

2

2 3

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

6 3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker operating switch to the 'CLOSE' position to close the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker operating switch to the 'TRIP' position to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

N/A

Labeling

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Insert the operating handle into the 'CLOSE' operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle CW to close the circuit breaker. Remove the operating handle. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. Close the control cabinet door. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 7 in the main picture.

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to G 7 in the main picture.

MAGRINI SCARPA E MAGNANO MMS24C CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPMagriniScarpaMMS24CCB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 6). Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

MAGRINI SCARPA E MAGNANO MMS24C CIRCUIT BREAKER

MAGRINI SCARPA E MAGNANO MMS24C CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPMagriniScarpaMMS24CCB2

Operation

N/A

Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 3

6

4

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Insert the operating handle into the 'OPEN' operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the operating handle ACW to open the circuit breaker. Remove the operating handle. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. Close the control cabinet door.

Operation

N/A

Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

6 4 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Unlock if required and rotate the control switch to the LOCAL position. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge operating mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the spring charge handle ACW to the stop position to charge the spring. Remove the handle. 5. If required rotate the control switch to the REMOTE position. Close the control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 6).

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the spring status via the mechanical indicator (Refer to arrow point 6).

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Nilsen JB422/OMI Retrofit Circuit Breaker 1600 Amps Fault SF6

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation. Note: These retrofit circuit breakers are only found on capacitor bank circuits. The capacitor bank circuit must be proven de-energised, using an approved testing device, prior to racking out the circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Switch Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm N/A

1B

32

1A

N/A

4B

4A

D3

5

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing / Opening CB - Local Electrically 1. Disable the circuit breaker remote control by either: A. Withdrawing the IPSS control fuses (2 off) or B. Inserting an isolating plug into the KRONE block as shown. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control switch CW to the stop position to close the circuit breaker. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker control switch ACW to the stop position to open the circuit breaker.

Operation Closing / Opening CB - Local Electrically

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Special Notes Caution

4. If required enable the circuit breaker remote control by either: A. Inserting the IPSS control fuses (2 off) as shown or B. Removing the isolating plug from the KRONE block. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Disable the circuit breaker remote control. 2. Stand to one side and push the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required enable the circuit breaker remote control. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAEIJB422OMIRetrofitCB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. The circuit breaker status flag may not always line up exactly with the viewing window. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAEIJB422OMIRetrofitCB2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

1. Confirm and note the circuit breaker bus bar position via the mechanical indicator - BACK or FRONT - as shown. 2. Disable the circuit breaker remote control. 3. Confirm the relevant circuit breaker is open.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm and note the bus bar position prior to racking out the circuit breaker.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution

4. Prior to racking out the circuit breaker confirm the capacitor bank circuit is de-energised using an approved testing device as shown.

4

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

D3

5. Simultaneously push the red 'PUSH TO TRIP' button and rotate the interlock handle ACW to the 'FREE' position.

5

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

5

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

C1

6 7

7

6. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 7. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the circuit breaker is fully lowered - arrow pointing to the 'WITHDRAW' indicator as shown. 8. Remove the racking handle.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

C2 F2

9. Rotate the two (2) bus bar position locking bars 90 degrees to the circuit breaker release position - fully recessed.

9

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm and note the bus bar position prior to racking out the circuit breaker.

9

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

C2 E2

10

10

10. Grasp the two (2) racking handles and carefully withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle.

Operation Locking / Unlocking Shutters

N/A

1. Identify and lock shutters at locking points as shown.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

D2

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Confirm relevant the shutter(s) have been unlocked. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Confirm the circuit breaker is in the fully lowered position. Confirm the interlock handle is in the 'FREE' position. Confirm the correct bus bar position and the relevant bus bar locking bars (2) are in the vertical (recessed) position. 6. Carefully push the circuit breaker into the cubicle to the stop position and reconfirm correct bus bar alignment.

5 4

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

C1

9 8

9

Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation. Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

7. Rotate the two (2) bus bar locking bars 90 degrees to the horizontal position. 8. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 9. Rotate the racking handle CW until the circuit breaker is fully raised - arrow pointing to the 'PLUGGED IN' indicator as shown. 10. Remove the racking handle.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

D3

Special Notes Caution

11. Rotate the 'LOCKING BOLT' interlock handle CW to the 'LOCKED' position. Note: Small adjustments to the circuit breaker height may be required a facilitate movement of the interlock handle.

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAEIJB422OMIRetrofitCB3

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

11

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN AEI JB422/OMI RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAEIJB422OMIRetrofitCB4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nilsen GEC OLX Retrofit Circuit Breaker 800 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation. Note: These retrofit circuit breakers are only found on capacitor bank circuits. The capacitor bank circuit must be proven de-energised, using an approved testing device, prior to racking out the circuit breaker.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Switch Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing / Opening CB - Local Electrically

N/A

32

1

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control switch CW to the stop position to close the circuit breaker. 3. Rotate the circuit breaker control switch ACW to the stop position to open the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the indicating light and mechanical indicator agree with the circuit breaker status. 5. If required, rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position.

Operation Closing / Opening CB - Local Manually

B3

2

2

C6

2

3

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle door. 3. Press the green 'I' button to close the circuit breaker. 4. Press the red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the indicating light and mechanical indicator agree with the circuit breaker status. 6. If required, rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch CW to the 'REMOTE' position. Close the cubicle door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Charging the CB Operating Spring - Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle door. 2. Insert the spring charge operating handle into the charging mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the handle CW until the mechanical indicator shows the operating spring is tensioned. Do not turn any further. 4. Remove the spring charge handle. Note: Do not attempt to rack down the circuit breaker with the spring charge handle inserted. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPNilsenGECOLXRetrofitCB1

The operating spring can only be charged with the circuit breaker in the fully raised position. Do not attempt to rack down the circuit breaker with the spring charge handle inserted. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 4

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

1. Confirm and note the circuit breaker bus bar position via the mechanical indicator - REAR BUSBARS or FRONT BUS BARS - as shown. 2. Rotate the 'CONTROL SELECTOR' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the relevant circuit breaker is open.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm and note the bus bar position prior to racking out the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution

4. Prior to racking out the circuit breaker confirm the capacitor bank circuit is de-energised using an approved testing device as shown.

4

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

B3

5. Open the circuit breaker cubicle door. 6. Raise the interlock handle to the 'FREE' position.

6

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

C8

7 8

N/A

2 of 4

Doc Ref: WPNilsenGECOLXRetrofitCB2

10

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

7. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 8. Push in and rotate the racking handle ACW until the circuit breaker is fully lowered - indicator aligns with 'LOWERED' 9. Remove the racking handle.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

10. Withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle taking care not to damage the auxiliary plug box cable. Note: The auxiliary plug box cannot be removed until the circuit breaker is clear of the cubicle as shown.

The auxiliary plug box cannot be removed until the circuit breaker is clear of the cubicle.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

A1 C1

11. Unscrew the two (2) retaining bolts and withdraw the circuit breaker auxiliary plug box. Carefully stow the plug box. 12. If required withdraw the circuit breaker clear of the cubicle

11

Special Notes Caution The auxiliary plug box cannot be removed until the circuit breaker is clear of the cubicle.

11

Operation Locking / Unlocking Shutters

N/A

1. Lock the shutters at the locking point as shown.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

1

1. Confirm the bus bar position selector is set to the correct position - REAR BARS or FRONT BARS. Picture shows REAR BARS setting.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

6

A1 C1

Ensure the correct identification of shutters prior to locking.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm relevant the shutters have been unlocked. 2. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker is in the fully lowered position. 4. Confirm the interlock handle is in the 'FREE' position. 6. Carefully push the circuit breaker to the entrance of the cubicle. Confirm the auxiliary plug box can be connected without damage to the cable.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker 7. Reconnect the auxiliary plug box, ensuring the locating pin correctly engages the interlock lever, then tighten the two (2) retaining bolts. 8. Push the circuit breaker into the cubicle to the stop position.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPPNilsenGECOLXRetrofitCB3

Special Notes Caution The circuit breaker cannot be pushed into the cubicle until the auxiliary plug box has been reconnected.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 4

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN GEC OLX RETROFIT CIRCUIT BREAKER

4 of 4

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPPNilsenGECOLXRetrofitCB4

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

9 10

9. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 10. Push in and rotate the racking handle CW until the circuit breaker is fully raised - indicator aligns with 'RAISED' 11. Remove the racking handle.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

B. 3

12

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

12. Lower the interlock handle to the 'LOCKED' position. Note: Small adjustments to the circuit breaker height may be required a facilitate movement of the interlock handle. 13. Close the circuit breaker cubicle door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 1 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 1 2000 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. There are two versions of this circuit breaker. If required refer to the Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 2 template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation

C7 G7

Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

2

3

3

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'L' position. 3. Raise the flap and press the black 'I' button to close or black 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'D' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 7, F 7 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution

Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual

4 4

3

C7 G7

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'L' position. 3. Unlock the manual control buttons. 4. Press the green button to close or red button to open the circuit breaker. 5. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'D' position. 6. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 7, F 7 in the main picture.

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'L' position. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge mechanism as shown. 4. Rotate the spring charge handle to charge the spring. 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'D' position.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation

C7 G7

Status Indicators

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 1

Doc Ref: WPNuovoMagGal36GIE25T2CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the operating spring has charged correctly via the mechanical indicator.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 1

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 1 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPNuovoMagGal36GIE25T2CB2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 2 Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 2 2000 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this circuit breaker. There are two versions of this circuit breaker. If required refer to the Nuovo Magrini Galileo 36 GI-E 25 Type 1 template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation

C5 G7

Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Electrical

3

2

3

1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'LOC' position. 3. Raise the flap and press the black 'I' button to close or black 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 4. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'DIST' position. 5. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation

C5 G7

4

4

3

C5 G7

4

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker - Local Manual 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'LOC' position. 3. Unlock the manual control buttons. 4. Press the green 'I' button to close or red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 5. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'DIST' position. 6. Close the circuit breaker control cabinet door.

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually 1. Open the circuit breaker control cabinet door. 2. Rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'LOC' position. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge mechanism as shown. 4. Lower the spring charge handle to charge the spring. 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. If required rotate the circuit breaker control key to the 'DIST' position. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 5, G 6 in the main picture.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the mechanical indicator. Refer to C 5, G 6 in the main picture.

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 2

Doc Ref: WPNuovoMagGal36GIE25T2CB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Confirm the operating spring has charged correctly via the mechanical indicator. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 2

NUOVO MAGRINI GALILEO 36 GI-E 25 TYPE 2 Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPNuovoMagGal36GIE25T2CB2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Reyrolle 2A9T/X1/MO Circuit Breaker 400 Amps, 800 Amps, Fault Oil

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. This circuit breaker has solenoid or manual spring charge operated versions. Note: The electrical local control for these circuit breakers is found on the left hand side of the circuit breaker racking structure. A white indicating arrow on the control panel will point to the corresponding circuit breaker. (Refer to the main picture - A 5, F 4)

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Via CB Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening / Closing the CB - Solenoid Operated

A5 D5 F4

12

1

2

G2

1

2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

Note: This type of control panel is used to control the solenoid operated circuit breakers.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

1. Rotate the 'OCB CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position to open the CB. 2. Rotate the 'OCB CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position to close the CB.

Confirm the correct CB control panel via the white indicating arrow.

Operation Charging the Spring Charge CB Operating Spring

G3

Manual Spring Charge

Feeder CB - Solenoid Operated

Special Notes Caution

1. Attach the spring charge operating handle to the charging mechanism as shown. 2. Raise and lower the spring charge operating handle approximately 9 times to charge the operating spring to the fully charged position. 3. Remove the spring charge operating handle. 4. Confirm the operating spring mechanical indicator displays 'CHARGED'.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Spring Charged Circuit Breaker

Special Notes Caution

Note: Manual closing is only available on the manual spring charge circuit breakers.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPReyrolle2A9TX1MOCB1

1. Confirm the CB operating spring is charged. Refer to the Charging the Spring Charge CB Operating Spring instruction if required. 2. Pull down the 'PULL TO CLOSE' ring to close the CB. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPReyrolle2A9TX1MOCB2

D5 H3

1

D4 H3

2

3

3

Operation Opening the Spring Charged Circuit Breaker

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the red 'PRESS TO TRIP' tab to open the circuit breaker. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the circuit breaker status.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker - Isolate Position

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Push the racking handle interlock lever towards the CB to engage the ratchet on the racking handle. 3. Raise and lower the racking handle until the CB racks out to the isolate position as shown. 4. Fully lower the racking handle to engage the CB interlock pins in the isolated position.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker - Isolate Position

B3

5. Note: When the CB is in the isolated position the CB contacts are clear of the bus / circuit spouts however the spout shutters are NOT closed - as shown.

Operation

B3

Racking Out the Circuit Breaker - Maintenance Position 6. Continue racking out the CB beyond the isolate position until the CB reaches the stop position at the end of the CB rack. 7. Confirm the CB spout shutters have closed correctly as shown.

B2

Operation Locking / Unlocking Shutter(s)

1

1. With the CB fully racked out to the maintenance position place locks on the CB shutters as required.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution When the CB is in the isolated position the CB shutters are NOT closed.

Special Notes Caution

Special Notes Caution Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

1

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Operation Confirming the Circuit Beaker Bus Position

D1

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker bus position via the indicators as shown.

Ensure the CB contacts have been correctly installed for the required bus configuration - Top or Bottom.

1

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

D4 H3

3 4

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the shutter locks have been removed. 3. Pull the racking handle interlock lever away from the CB to engage the ratchet on the racking handle. 4. Raise and lower the racking handle until the CB racks in to the stop position. 5. Fully lower the racking handle to engage the CB interlock pins.

Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure the shutter locks have been removed and the shutter control mechanism sleeves are in position and the retaining nuts tightened.

Operation Disabling the Auto Reclose

B7

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the auto reclose 'SELECTOR SWITCH' CW to the 'NON AUTO' position then release to disable the auto reclose. 2. Confirm the auto reclose disabled indicating light is illuminated.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior disabling the auto reclose. Confirm the correct CB control panel via the white indicating arrow.

Operation Enabling the Auto Reclose

B7

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the auto reclose 'SELECTOR SWITCH' ACW to the 'AUTO' position then release to enable the auto reclose. 2. Confirm the auto reclose disabled indicating light is off.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior enabling the auto reclose.

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPReyrolle2A9TX1MOCB3

Confirm the correct CB control panel via the white indicating arrow.

Operation Confirming the CB Trip Circuit is Healthy

B7

1 1

Special Notes Caution

1. Turn and press the Trip Circuit Healthy button and confirm the 'TC HEALTHY' indicating light is illuminated. 2. Release the Trip Circuit Healthy button.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation. Confirm the correct CB control panel via the white indicating arrow.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER

REYROLLE 2A9T/X1/MO CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPReyrolle2A9TX1MOCB4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE D16 GFC H VT Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Reyrolle D16 GFC H VT Various Nil Oil

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT is fit for service prior to and after any operation. When racking in the VT ensure the contact spouts shutter opens correctly.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Racking Out the VT

N/A

1

1. Confirm the relevant circuit breaker is open. 2. Unscrew the relay panel retaining bolt. 3. Open the relay panel to allow access to the VT.

3

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

REYROLLE D16 GFC H VT

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleD16GFCHVT1

Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to any operation.

2

Operation Racking Out the VT

H3

4. Unlock if required and raise the shutters / racking interlock. 5. Withdraw the VT from the VT CB cubicle.

4

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to any operation.

4

Operation Racking Out the VT

H3

6. Confirm the VT contact spout shutters have closed correctly as shown. Lock if required. Note: To restore the VT to service reverse the above instructions.

Special Notes Caution When racking in the VT ensure the contact spouts shutter opens correctly.

6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

REYROLLE D16 GFC H VT

REYROLLE D16 GFC H VT Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleD16GFCHVT2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Reyrolle LMVP X5B / X8 Circuit Breaker 800 - 2500 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval. Confirm the service position selector mechanism is in the correct position - Front Service, Rear Service - prior to racking in the circuit breaker. Confirm the circuit breaker cubicle access door is fully closed and latched prior to any electrical operation. For instructions on earthing using this circuit breaker refer to the Reyrolle LMVP X5B X8 CB Earthing template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening - Electric Closing - Electric Opening - Manual Closing - Manual

Racking Shutters Plug Box CB Earth Facility

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm D5

4 3

1

1. Rotate the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged 3. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH' CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker status 'CB CLOSED' indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

Operation Opening the CB - Local Electrical

3

1. Rotate the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH' ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker status 'CB OPEN' indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

2

1

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the CB - Local Electrical

4

D5

Oil Levels

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CB1

Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

3

F3

5

Operation Closing the CB - Manually

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

4

1. Rotate the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged 3. Unlock and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 4. Pull the 'PULL TO CLOSE' ring to close the circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval. 1 of 4

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

G3

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CB2

Operation Opening the CB - Manually

4

1. Rotate the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Unlock and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. Pull the 'PULL TO TRIP' ring to open the circuit breaker. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

3

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

D5 2

N/A

1. Confirm the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' ACW to the 'OFF' position. 3. Unlock and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

4

5

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Manual charging of the operating spring should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to operate the circuit breaker with the spring charge handle attached.

4

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

G1

4

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' ACW to the 'OFF' position. 4. Unlock and open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 5. Lower the circuit breaker 'SELECTOR' interlock to the 'ISOLATING MECHANISM - FREE' position.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

D6

6 9

2 of 4

4. Attach the socket on the spring charge handle to the square nut on the spring charge mechanism as shown. 5. Raise the spring charge handle to the stop position to charge the operating spring. 6. Remove the spring charge handle. 7. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 8. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' CW to the 'ON' position.

Special Notes Caution

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

6. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door to a 'slightly open' position. 7. Rotate the racking handle access plate and insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. Refer to the adjacent caution note for further details. 8. Confirm the racking handle has engaged correctly then close and latch the cubicle access door. 9. Locate the racking handle locking flange over the locking tab and padlock as shown.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution There are two types of racking handle - long or short. Confirm the circuit breaker service position front or rear busbars - and select the appropriate racking handle.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

D6

10

11

10. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the circuit breaker reaches the 'FULLY LOWERED' position. 11. Unlock and remove the padlock from the racking handle locking flange. 12. Remove the racking handle. 13. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

G1 14

Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

Special Notes Caution

14. Shift the circuit breaker 'SELECTOR' interlock up and across to the 'LOCATING BOLT - FREE' position.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution

15. If the circuit breaker has to be removed from the circuit breaker cubicle... 16. Unscrew the two (2) retaining bolts and remove the cubicle sealing rail.

15

X2

H2 17

17

17

Special Notes Caution

19

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker 17. Grasp the racking handles and carefully withdraw the circuit breaker until just clear of the circuit breaker cubicle as shown. 18. Push back the retaining clip and withdraw and stow the auxiliary cable plug. 19. Withdraw the circuit breaker from the circuit breaker cubicle.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the auxiliary cable plug is stowed correctly to avoid damage to contacts.

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CB3

18

Operation Locking the Shutter(s)

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Identify shutter(s) (Busbars, Circuit - Front or Rear) to be locked closed.

Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

Front Rear

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

3 of 4

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CB4

N/A 2

2. Attach padlock(s) to the required shutter(s) at the shutter operating mechanism as shown

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

G1 5

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' is in the 'LOCAL' position. 3. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' is in the 'OFF' position. 4. Confirm the shutter(s) have been unlocked. 5. Confirm the 'SELECTOR' interlock is in the 'LOCATING BOLT - FREE' position as shown.

6

H2 9 9

9 7

7

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

11

10. Replace the cubicle sealing rail and tighten the two retaining bolts. 11. Shift the circuit breaker 'SELECTOR' interlock across and down to the 'ISOLATING MECHANISM - FREE' position. 12. Close and latch the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 13. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. Refer to points 7 & 9 - Racking Out the Circuit Breaker for detailed instructions.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker 14

17

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation. Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

Special Notes Caution

6. Confirm the circuit breaker service position selector is in the required position - front or rear busbars. 7. Push the circuit breaker app. half distance into the circuit breaker cubicle as shown. 8. Plug in the auxiliary cable plug and pull the retaining clip forwards. 9. Grasp the racking handles and push the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker cubicle to the stop position.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

G1

D6 G1

4 of 4

Operation Locking the Shutter(s)

Special Notes Caution Ensure the cubicle sealing rail is replaced after racking in the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution

14. Rotate the racking handle CW until the circuit breaker reaches the 'FULLY RAISED' position. 15. Unlock and remove the racking handle. 16. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 17. Shift the circuit breaker 'SELECTOR' interlock up to the 'ISOLATING MECHANISM - LOCKED' position. 18. Close and latch the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 19. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' CW to the 'AUTO' position.

Do not rotate the racking handle if unexpected resistance is encountered seek appropriate assistance.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CB EARTHING Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Reyrolle LMVP X5B / X8 CB Earthing 800 - 2500 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution When in the circuit earth position this circuit breaker must be closed local electrically and can only be opened manually. Confirm the circuit breaker cubicle access door is fully closed and latched prior to electrically closing the circuit breaker. Note the normal service position of the circuit breaker - Front Service or Rear Service - prior to racking into the circuit earth position. For detailed instructions on racking this circuit breaker refer to the Reyrolle LMVP X5B X8 Circuit Breaker template in this manual.

Operation Options Closing - Electric Opening - Manual Closing - Manual

Racking Shutters Plug Box

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Selecting the Circuit Earth Position

G2 AB

A

B

Special Notes Caution

A. If the circuit breaker normal service position is the Front Service position shift the selector pin to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position as shown.

Note the normal service position of the circuit breaker - Front Service or Rear Service - prior to racking into the circuit earth position.

B. If the circuit breaker normal service position is the Rear Service position remove the 'REAR SERVICE' padlock, raise latch and re-padlock. Shift the selector pin to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position as shown.

N/A

5

3

Operation Earthing the Circuit Via the Circuit Breaker

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the circuit breaker service position selector is in the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position. 2. Confirm the correct shutters are locked closed. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 4. Confirm the 'CB SELECTOR SWITCH' is in the 'LOCAL' position. 5. Confirm the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' is in the 'OFF' position.

4

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Earthing the Circuit Via the Circuit Breaker

N/A

6 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CB EARTHING

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CBEarth1

Special Notes Caution

6. Rack in the circuit breaker to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH' position. Refer to the Reyrolle LMVP X5B X8 Circuit Breaker template in this manual for detailed instructions if required. 7. Close and latch the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 8. Rotate the 'SPRING CHARGE MOTOR SWITCH' CW to the 'AUTO' position. 9. Confirm the operating spring fully charges.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CB EARTHING

REYROLLE LMVP X5B / X8 CB EARTHING Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPReyrolleLMVPX5BX8CBEarth2

Operation Earthing the Circuit Via the Circuit Breaker

N/A 11 11 10

10. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL SWITCH' CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker to earth the circuit. 11. Confirm the circuit breaker status 'CB CLOSED' indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows

Operation Earthing the Circuit Via the Circuit Breaker

E5

12. If required, open the circuit breaker cubicle access door and lock and tag the manual 'PULL TO TRIP' mechanism as shown.

N/A

4

Operation Removing the Circuit Breaker Earth from the Circuit 1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. If required, unlock and remove the padlock and tag from the manual 'PULL TO TRIP' mechanism. 3. Pull the 'PULL TO TRIP' ring to open the circuit breaker and remove the circuit earth. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker mechanical indicator shows

3

Operation Removing the Circuit Breaker Earth from the Circuit

G2

Special Notes Caution Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated prior to closing the circuit breaker.

Special Notes Caution Note: When closed in the circuit earth position the circuit breaker can only be opened manually.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Note: When closed in the circuit earth position this circuit breaker can only be opened manually.

Special Notes Caution

5. Rack out the circuit breaker. Refer to the Reyrolle LMVP X5B X8 Circuit Breaker template in this manual for detailed instructions if required. 6. Shift the selector pin to the Rear Service / Front Service position as required

G2

B

A

Operation Selecting the Circuit Breaker Service Position A. If the circuit breaker normal service position is the Front Service position shift the selector pin to the 'FRONT SERVICE' position as shown.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the correct circuit breaker service position is confirmed and set prior to racking in the circuit breaker.

B. If the circuit breaker normal service position is the Rear Service position remove the 'REAR SERVICE' padlock, lower and re-padlock. Shift the selector pin to the 'REAR SERVICE' position as shown.

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Circuit Breaker 630 / 2000 Amps Fault SF6

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker is fit for service, with operating springs fully charged, prior to and after any operation. Note: The circuit breaker cubicle access doors cannot be opened when the circuit breaker is in the racked in - service - position. Note: Switching the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch sends a signal to the control room. For operation of the Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Earth Switch and VT refer to the appropriate templates in this manual.

Operation Options Opening - Electrical / Manual Closing - Electrical / Manual Racking Spring Charge - Electric / Manual Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm 3

A2

2

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Closing the CB - Local Electrical 1

1

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock then rotate the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'TRIP / CLOSE' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position and release to close the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the 'CB CLOSED' red indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows 4. If required rotate the Local / Remote switch to the 'REMOTE' position and re-lock.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation.

3

B6

3

Operation Opening the CB - Local Electrical 2

1

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Unlock then rotate the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch ACW to the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Rotate the 'TRIP / CLOSE' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position and release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the 'CB OPEN' green indication light illuminates and the mechanical indicator shows 4. If required rotate the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch to the 'REMOTE' position and re-lock.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation.

3

Operation

E3

Special Notes Caution

Charging the Operating Spring - Manually 3

4 app.13 times

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Confirm the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the CB cubicle access door. 3. Insert the spring charge handle as shown. 4. Raise / lower the spring charge handle approx. 13 times until the spring charge mechanical indicator points to (Spring charged) 5. Remove the spring charge handle. 6. If required, close and latch the CB cubicle access door. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Do not attempt to operate the CB with the spring charge handle in place. Manually charging the operating spring should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 4

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1CB2

N/A

4

5

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker - Manually

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Open the CB cubicle access door. 3. Confirm the operating spring is charged 4. Press the green 'I' button to close the circuit breaker. 5. Press the red 'O' button to open the circuit breaker. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicators agree with the circuit breaker status (Closed) (Open) 7. If required, close and latch the CB cubicle access door.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

B6

1. Confirm the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 2. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 3. Raise the access cover and simultaneously press the red trip button whilst rotating the selector switch CW to the neutral position -

3

Manual operation should only be performed in emergency situations with the appropriate approval.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating.

3

Operation

B6

Racking Out the Circuit Breaker 4. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the CB reaches the fully racked position. Remove the racking handle. 6. Rotate the selector switch CW to the racked out position -

6 4

5

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

7. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 8. Raise the retaining clip as shown and remove and stow the circuit breaker auxiliary cable plug in the appropriate receptacle on the circuit breaker mechanism.

8

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

9 9

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker auxiliary cable is stowed safely after removal.

Special Notes Caution

9. Using the raise / lower handle align the circuit breaker removal trolley with the circuit breaker cubicle ensuring the locating pins seat home correctly as shown.

Small up / down adjustments of the circuit breaker trolley may be required to align with the locating pins correctly.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

9

9

2 of 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

10

Special Notes Caution

10. Rotate the trolley locking levers CW app. 60 degrees to lock the trolley into position.

10

Ensure the circuit breaker trolley is locked into position before attempting to withdraw the circuit breaker.

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

11

11

14

14

11,13

Special Notes Caution

11. Rotate the selector switch CW to the unlock position 12. Using the handles as shown slowly withdraw the circuit breaker onto the trolley to the stop position. 13. Rotate the selector switch ACW to the racked out position to lock the circuit breaker onto the trolley. 14. Rotate the trolley locking levers ACW to release the trolley from the circuit breaker cubicle. 15. Remove and stow the circuit breaker as required.

Withdraw the circuit breaker onto to the trolley with care.

Operation Locking the Shutters

N/A

Special Notes Caution

1. Identify and lock shutters as required.

Ensure the correct identification of shutters prior to locking.

1 1

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Confirm the shutters are unlocked. 3. Confirm the 'LOCAL / REMOTE' switch is in the 'LOCAL' position. 4. Using the raise / lower handle align the circuit breaker removal trolley with the circuit breaker cubicle ensuring the locating pins seat home correctly. 5. Rotate the trolley locking levers CW app. 60 degrees as shown to lock the trolley into position. 6. Rotate the selector switch CW to the unlock position

5

5

Special Notes Caution

6

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

8

8 10

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution

7. Push the circuit breaker into the CB cubicle. 8. Rotate the trolley locking levers ACW app. 60 degrees to unlock the trolley. 9. Remove the circuit breaker trolley from the CB cubicle and stow appropriately. 10. Unstow and insert the circuit breaker auxiliary cable plug and close the retaining clip. 11. Close the circuit breaker cubicle access door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Ensure the shutters are unlocked prior to racking in the circuit breaker.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1CB3

Note: The circuit breaker cannot be racked in unless the CB cubicle door is closed correctly.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

4 of 3

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 CB

4 of 4

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1CB4

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

B6

12. Raise the access cover and simultaneously press the red trip button whilst rotating the selector switch CW to the neutral position -

12

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating.

12

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

B6

13

15

Special Notes Caution

13. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 14. Rotate the racking handle CW until the CB reaches the fully racked in - service - position. Remove the racking handle. 15. Rotate the selector switch ACW to the racked in position -

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operating.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

14

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 EARTH SWITCH Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Earth Switch Fault Nil Air

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch is fit for service prior to and after any operation. For operation of the Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Circuit Breaker and VT refer to the appropriate templates in this manual.

Operation Options Opening - Manual Closing - Manual Earthing Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm D2 1

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Closing the Earth Switch 1. Confirm the circuit breaker is racked out and the circuit breaker interlock is in the racked out and locked position as shown -

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

G4 G5

2. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' with the LED indicators. 3. Rotate the earth switch interlock CW to the unlocked position -

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operating. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

3

G5

Labeling

6

Operation Closing the Earth Switch

4

4. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 5. Rotate the operating handle CW until the earth switch closes. Remove the operating handle. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 5

7. If required rotate the earth switch interlock CW to the locked on position.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 EARTH SWITCH

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1ES1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operating. Ensure the remote end of the circuit to be earthed is isolated.

6 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 EARTH SWITCH

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 EARTH SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Locking Off Circuit Breaker Racking

G6

1. If required rotate the circuit breaker racking lock interlock 90o CW to the position. The circuit breaker cannot be racked in when in this position. Note: This interlock operates independently to the earth switch and associated interlocks.

1

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

G5 2

3

G5

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1ES2

1. If required rotate the earth switch interlock ACW to the unlocked position as shown 2. Insert the operating handle into the earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 3. Rotate the operating handle ACW until the earth switch opens.

Operation Opening the Earth Switch

5

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the earth switch location and labeling prior to operating.

Special Notes Caution

4. Remove the operating handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows 6. If required rotate the earth switch interlock ACW to the locked off position.

6 3 5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 VT Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Schneider AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 VT N/A Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT is fit for service prior to and after any operation. For operation of the Schneider AD4 MC Set Type SF1 Circuit Breaker and Earth Switch refer to the appropriate templates in this manual.

Operation Options Racking HV Fuses Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Racking Out the VT

E4 1

2

Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operating.

Operation O Racking Out the VT

Special Notes Caution

2. Insert the racking handle into the VT racking mechanism. 3. Rotate the racking handle ACW to the stop position VT fully racked out. Remove the racking handle. 4. Confirm the VT is fully racked out via the viewing ports. 5. Rotate the interlock ACW to the locked out position.

3

4

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the VT interlock ACW to the unlocked position -

E4 D5

4

Oil Levels

Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operating.

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 VT

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1VT1

4

G3 G8 2

Operation Access to the VT HV Fuses 1. Confirm the VT is fully racked out and the interlock is in the locked out position. 2. Using the racking handle unscrew the two (2) VT access door retaining bolts. 3. Open the VT access door.

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operating. Confirm the VT interlock is in the locked out position prior to unscrewing the access door retaining bolts.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 VT

SCHNEIDER AD4 MC Set TYPE SF1 EARTH SWITCH

2 of 2

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPSchneiderAD4MCSetSF1VT2

O Operation Access to the VT HV fuses

N/A

4. Identify the HV fuse(s) to be changed. 5. Push in and rotate ACW and remove the clear plastic HV fuse retaining cap. 6. Withdraw the HV fuse. 7. Insert the replacement HV fuse with the striker pin facing outwards. 8. Replace the HV fuse retaining cap. 9. Close the VT access door and insert and tighten the two (2) retaining bolts.

5 7

3

E4

Operation Racking In the VT 1. Confirm the VT access door retaining bolts are securely tightened. 2. Rotate the VT interlock CW to the unlocked position -

Special Notes Caution Exercise caution when handling the HV fuses as they may be hot.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operating.

3. Insert the racking handle into the VT racking mechanism.

Operation O Racking In the VT

G3 G8

4. Rotate the racking handle CW to the stop position VT fully racked in. Remove the racking handle. 5. Confirm the VT is fully racked in via the viewing ports. 6. Rotate the interlock CW to the locked in position.

4

5

5

Special Notes Caution Confirm the VT location and labeling prior to operating.

5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Western Power CB Earth Switch - Generic Fault Nil Air

Special Notes Caution Confirm the CB earth switch is the correct type prior to any operation. Ensure the appropriate contacts are attached in the correct position on the CB earth switch prior to racking into the CB cubicle. Ensure the CB earth switch earthing leads are firmly attached to the relevant earth connectors prior to racking into the CB cubicle.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm E2 3

3

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Racking In the CB Earth Switch

3

1. Confirm the relevant CB is racked out and removed from the CB cubicle. 2. Confirm the CB earth switch is the correct type. 3. Confirm the appropriate contacts are attached in the correct position on the CB earth switch. 4. Confirm the appropriate CB shutters are unlocked.

Operation Racking In the CB Earth Switch

N/A

5. Attach the CB earth switch leads to the relevant earthing connectors.

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the CB earth switch is the correct type prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution Ensure the earthing leads are attached firmly to the correct earthing connections.

5

Operation Racking In the CB Earth Switch

C5 G7

8

7

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

6. Confirm the CB earth switch is open. 7. Confirm the CB earth switch racking interlock is in the free to rack position - across to the right. 8. Confirm the CB earth switch operating mechanism interlock pin is in position as shown. 9. Push the CB earth switch into the relevant CB cubicle ensuring the contacts align with the appropriate spout shutters.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC

Doc Ref: WPWPCBEarthSwitch1

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to rack up the CB earth switch with the racking interlock across to the left.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPWPCBEarthSwitch2

Operation Racking In the CB Earth Switch

E8

10. Attach the racking handle to the CB earth switch racking mechanism. 11. Rotate the racking handle CW until the CB earth switch reaches the 'PLUGGED IN' position. Remove the racking handle.

11

Confirm the correct shutters open when racking up the CB earth switch.

10

Operation Racking In the CB Earth Switch

D5 E5 13

12. Slide the racking interlock across to the left. 13. Remove the CB earth switch operating mechanism interlock pin.

Special Notes Caution Small racking up / down adjustments may be required to align the CB earth switch with the racking mechanism interlock.

12

Operation Closing the CB Earth Switch

D3 E5 1

3

1. Confirm 'Safe To Earth' via the neon indicators. 2. Attach the operating handle to the CB earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 3. Lower the racking handle to the stop position to close the CB earth switch. Remove the racking handle.

2

E4 4

4

Operation Closing the CB Earth Switch

2

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the remote end of the circuit is isolated prior to closing the CB earth switch.

Special Notes Caution

4. Unscrew the retaining bolt and rotate the viewing port cover plate and confirm the CB earth switch has closed correctly. 5. If required insert the CB earth switch operating mechanism interlock pin and lock off.

Operation Opening the CB Earth Switch

E5

2 of 3

Special Notes Caution

1. If required unlock and remove the CB earth switch operating mechanism interlock pin. 2. Attach the operating handle to the CB earth switch operating mechanism as shown. 3. Raise the racking handle to the stop position to open the CB earth switch. Remove the racking handle. 4. Confirm the CB earth switch has opened correctly via the viewing port.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the CB earth switch has opened correctly via the viewing port.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Racking Out the CB Earth Switch

E5

1. Confirm the CB earth switch is open. 2. Insert, and lock if required, the CB earth switch operating mechanism interlock pin. 3. Slide the racking mechanism interlock across to the right.

2 3

Operation Racking Out the CB Earth Switch

E8

5

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

4. Attach the racking handle to the CB earth switch racking mechanism. 5. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the CB earth switch reaches the 'FULLY LOWERED' position. Remove the racking handle. 6. If required slide the racking mechanism interlock across to the left. 7. Withdraw the CB earth switch from the CB cubicle. 8. Disconnect the CB earth switch earth leads.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Do not attempt to rack down the CB earth switch with the racking interlock across to the left.

Special Notes Caution Stow the CB earth switch in the designated storage location at the completion of operations.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC

Doc Ref: WPWPCBEarthSwitch3

3 of 3

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC

WESTERN POWER CB EARTH SWITCH - GENERIC Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPWPCBEarthSwitch4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

WESTINGHOUSE (SIEMENS) RETROFIT J18 CB Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Westinghouse (Siemens) Retrofit J18 CB 800 Amps 26 KA Vacuum

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote / local electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm N/A

21

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Special Notes Caution

1. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch CW to the 'CLOSE' position then release to close the circuit breaker. 2. Rotate the 'CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL' switch ACW to the 'TRIP' position then release to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. Press the black close button to close the circuit breaker. 3. If required close the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators.

2

3 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Status Indicators

Operation Closing / Opening the CB - Local Electrical

Operation Closing the CB - Local Manual

E4

E4

Oil Levels

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation. Electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Operation Opening the CB - Local Manual

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged. Refer to the 'Charging the Operating Spring' instruction if required. 3. Unlock the operating mechanism cover plate and rotate clear of the close push button as shown. 4. Press the black open button to open the circuit breaker. 5. If required rotate, close and lock the cover plate. 6. Confirm the circuit breaker status via the indicating lights and mechanical indicators. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

WESTINGHOUSE (SIEMENS) RETROFIT J18 CB

Doc Ref: WPWestinghouseRetrofitJ18CB1

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to any operation. Electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

WESTINGHOUSE (SIEMENS) RETROFIT J18 CB

WESTINGHOUSE (SIEMENS) RETROFIT J18 CB Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPWestinghouseRetrofitJ18CB2

F6 D7 3

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 3. Move the interlock bolt up and across to the left 'WITHDRAW' position. 4. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. 5. Rotate the racking handle CW until the CB reaches the fully lowered position. Remove the racking handle.

Special Notes Caution Withdraw the circuit breaker with care. If resistance is encountered stop and investigate.

4

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

F7

6

E4

2 3

5

Operation Charging the Operating Spring - Manually

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

F4 F2

1

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open and in the fully lowered position, interlock up and across to the left. 2. Confirm all required shutters are unlocked. 3. If required insert the CB plug box and close the retaining clip. 4. If required confirm the required CB location - front or rear busbars. 5. Using the racking handle push the CB into the CB cubicle to the front or rear busbar position as required.

1

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

9

7

6. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the left. 7. Grasp the circuit breaker racking handle and withdraw the circuit breaker from the cubicle. 8. If required open the retaining clip and remove the circuit breaker plug box. 9. If required identify and lock the appropriate shutters. Refer to the EMAIL J18 SOLENOID CB template in this manual for details.

1. Open the circuit breaker cubicle access door. 2. Unlock the operating mechanism cover plate and rotate clear of the spring charge mechanism as shown. 3. Insert the spring charge handle into the spring charge mechanism. 4. Rotate the spring charge handle CW until the operating spring is latched - fully charged. Remove the handle. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator shows charged.

F4 G7

2 of 2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

6

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

6. Move the circuit breaker location bolt lever across to the right. 7. Attach the racking handle to the racking mechanism. 8. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the CB reaches the fully raised, service position. Remove the racking handle. 9. Move the interlock bolt across to the right and down. 10. If required close the cubicle access door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Stow the plug box ensuring electrical contacts are not exposed possible damage.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the operating spring is fully charged via the mechanical indicator before operating.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the required shutters are unlocked prior to racking in the circuit breaker. Confirm the busbar position locator is set to the correct position - front or rear before racking in the CB.

Special Notes Caution Slight adjustment of the racking handle, up or down, may be required to allow the interlock pin to engage correctly.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

Yorkshire YSF6 Circuit Breaker 630 Amps Fault SF6

Special Notes Caution Ensure the circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation. Remote electrical operation of this circuit breaker is always the preferred method of operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Via CB Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Manually

B5

2

1. Open the circuit breaker access door. 2. Lower the 'TRIP' lever to open the circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicators agree with the circuit breaker status.

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation.

C4

2

3

3

Special Notes Caution

1. Open the circuit breaker access door. 2. Rotate the spring charge mechanism access flap and insert the spring charge ratchet handle. 3. Rotate the ratchet handle CW until the spring charge mechanism latches free and the spring charge mechanical indicator indicates 'SPRINGS CHARGED'.

Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Closing the Circuit Breaker - Manually

C6

2

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

3

4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Open the circuit breaker access door. 2. Confirm the operating spring is charged correctly. 3. If required unlock and remove the padlock from the 'CLOSE' lever interlock. 4. Lower the 'CLOSE' lever to close the circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicators agree with the circuit breaker status.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPYorkshireYSF6CB1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation. Ensure the operation spring is fully charged prior to operating. Remote operation is always the preferred method of operation. Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 3

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPYorkshireYSF6CB2

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

E3

1. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 2. Ensure the circuit breaker door is closed. 3. Raise the interlock pin and lower the racking mechanism access cover. 4. Rotate the selector lever ACW app. 90 degrees to the 'FREE' position.

4 3

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

E3

5. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 6. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the mechanism 'spins free'. 7. Remove the racking handle.

5

6

Operation Racking Out the Circuit Breaker

N/A

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

8. Withdraw the circuit breaker from the circuit breaker cubicle.

8

N/A

3

2

2 5

5

Operation Locking / Unlocking Shutter(s) Locking shutter(s) 1. Identify shutter(s) to be locked closed. 2. Pull the shutter control lever forwards and latch in position. 3. Insert padlock where shown. Unlocking shutter(s) 4. Unlock and remove the padlock from the shutter(s) 5. Raise the shutter lever then push forward to the stop position to release the locking mechanism.

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

N/A

4 1 2

1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the circuit breaker is open. Confirm the circuit breaker is in the service position. Confirm shutter(s) have been unlocked. Confirm the circuit breaker door is closed and the racking mechanism access cover is open. 5. Push the circuit breaker into the circuit breaker cubicle to the stop position.

Special Notes Caution Ensure correct identification of shutter(s) prior to locking.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the location and labeling of the circuit breaker prior to operation. Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in. Ensure shutter(s) have been unlocked prior to racking in.

2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Operation Racking In the Circuit Breaker

E3

6

7

9

Special Notes Caution

6. 7. 8. 9.

Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. Rotate the racking handle CW to the stop position. Remove the racking handle. Rotate the selector lever CW to the 'LOCKED' position. 10. Close the racking mechanism access cover.

Ensure the circuit breaker is pushed firmly to the first stop position. If not, the racking mechanism thread may not engage correctly.

Operation Earthing the Circuit Using the Circuit Breaker

N/A

3

3 2

Special Notes Caution

1. Open and rack out the circuit breaker. 2. Raise the access flap and insert the winding handle into the CB raise / lower winding mechanism. 3. Rotate the winding handle ACW and lower the circuit breaker to the 'CIRCUIT EARTH / LOWER' position. 4. Confirm the circuit breaker is open. 5. Confirm the yellow 'CIRCUIT' shutter is unlocked. 6. Push the circuit breaker into the CB cubicle and rack into position as per 'Racking In' instructions above.

Ensure the circuit breaker is open prior to racking in to the circuit earth position. Ensure the yellow 'CIRCUIT' shutter is unlocked prior to racking in the circuit breaker.

Operation Earthing the Circuit Using the Circuit Breaker

C6

8

Special Notes Caution

7. If required, charge the circuit breaker operating spring. 8. Lower the 'CLOSE' lever to close the circuit breaker thereby earthing the incomer HV Cable.

Ensure the remote end of the circuit is isolated / earthed prior to earthing using the circuit breaker.

Operation Removing the Circuit Breaker Earth from the Circuit

N/A

1. 2. 3. 4.

5

4

5

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPYorkshireYSF6CB3

Special Notes Caution

Lower the 'TRIP' lever to open the circuit breaker. Confirm the mech indicator agrees with the CB status. Rack out the circuit breaker. Raise the access flap and insert the winding handle into the CB raise / lower winding mechanism. 5. Rotate the winding handle CW and raise the circuit breaker to the 'UPPER' position. 6. The circuit breaker is now ready to be installed in the service position.

Ensure the circuit breaker is fully raised to the 'UPPER' position before racking in to the service position.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 3

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER

YORKSHIRE YSF6 CIRCUIT BREAKER Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPYorkshireYSF6CB4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Voltage KV 330 22 220 11 132 6.6 33 N/A

Various Various N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution The following table shows protection relay flags and their corresponding descriptions for the Western Power Distribution System. This table should be read in conjunction with Protection Relay templates issued in this manual.

ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS - DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

1

Standard Overcurrent Time

R

2

Standard Overcurrent Time

W

3

Standard Overcurrent Time

B

4

Standard Overcurrent Instantaneous

R

5

Standard Overcurrent Instantaneous

W

6

Standard Overcurrent Instantaneous

B

7

Directional Overcurrent

R

8

Directional Overcurrent

W B

9

Directional Overcurrent

10

Definite Time Overcurrent LBU1

11

Definite Time Overcurrent LBU2

12

Interlocked Overcurrent

13

Time Delayed Overcurrent

14

Definite Time / Sensitive Earth Fault

15

Standard Earth Fault Time

16

Standard Earth Fault Instantaneous

17

Directional Earth Fault

18

Neutral Earth Fault

19

Standby Earth Fault

20

Pilot Protection No. 1

21

Pilot Protection No. 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

PHASE

NOT APPLICABLE

FLAG

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS - DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Doc Ref: WPFaultRelayFlagsDist1

1 of 1

ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS - DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPFaultRelayFlagsDist2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Reference

Western Power N/A N/A N/A N/A

Network Standard NS 05-20

Special Notes The purpose of this template is to provide an understanding of the labelling requirements of distribution network equipment. For a detailed guide refer to the Western Power Network Standard NS 05-20 document. Caution Labels are to be placed so they can be seen without infringing safety clearances. Labels that are missing or found not to comply with the Network Standard NS 05-20 must be reported. Switchgear Category Abbreviations The table below lists the abbreviations / acronyms for the equipment types on the Western Power er distribution network. The Voltage column shows the operational voltage for the equipment type High Voltage Low Voltage. The Example Shown column indicates label samples displayed on this template. Acronym

Equipment Type

Voltage

Example Shown

CAPB

Capacitor Bank

DISO

Disconnector Overhead

DISU

Disconnector Underground

1 2 3 4

DOF

Drop Out Fuse

1 2 3 4

DSTR

Distribution Transformer

1 2 3 4

FLTI

Fault Indicator

FSDU

Fuse Disconnector, Underground

1 2 3 4

FSSW

Fuse Switch

1 2 3 4

ISTX

Isolating Transformer

KISK

Kiosk

1 2 3 4

LVDF

Low Voltage Distribution Frame

1 2 3 4

METU

Metering Unit

1 2 3 4

PILL

Pillar

PTSD

Pole Top Switch

REAC

Reactor

RECL

Recloser

1 2 3 4

RGTR

Regulating Transformer

1 2 3 4

SBST

Substation

SD

Surge Diverter

SECT

Sectionaliser

SLCB

Street Light Control Box

SWDC

Switch Disconnector

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

Doc Ref: WPDistLabelling1

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

Sample Labels Address Line - General Terms Indicates where the circuit goes to. Indicates where the circuit comes from. Indicates the address where the equipment is located Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 4

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPDistLabelling2

Sample Labels - High Voltage

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the switch or isolator; this may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID, the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the location of the next switching point down the line to which the switch disconnector is connected. Sample - Distribution substation. Sample - Zone substation feeder. Sample - Aerial line.

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the fuse switch; this may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID, the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Name & Address - Name of the transformer. This is usually a number and name of the location of the transformer at the remote end of the cable. Where the cable feeds a local transformer, only the name of the transformer is shown.

Address - This is the street number and name of the remote end of the cable which feeds the transformer. For transformers with piggy-back connections the street number of the remote end of the downstream cable is also mentioned. Name - Abbreviated alphanumeric name given to the transformer. In suburban and commercial areas the transformers will be named using the location street name and nearest address, eg. 365 Wellington St. In substations housing more than one transformer the transformer name will have a suffix TX1, TX2. Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS)

2 of 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

1 2 3 4 Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Sample Labels - High Voltage Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Abbreviated alphanumeric name given to the substation. This usually is the street name with a suffix sequential number included if more than one substation is located in the street. For multi zone substations, each will have a separate Pick ID number and will be named by zone. Address - This is the street number and name of the location of the substation

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Abbreviated alphanumeric name given to the metering transformer. This usually is the street name with a suffix sequential number included if more than one metering transformer is located in the street. Address - This is the street number and name of the location of the metering transformer.

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

Doc Ref: WPDistLabelling3

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Abbreviated alphanumeric name given to the regulator. This is usually the street name with a suffix sequential number if there is more than one regulator.

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the drop-out fuse switch. This may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the street number and location of the transformer supplied by the DOF.

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the recloser. This may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the street number and location of the pole.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

3 of 4

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

EQUIPMENT LABEL READING

1 2 3 4 Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPDistLabelling4

Sample Labels - High Voltage Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the pole-top switch disconnector. This may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the street number and location of the pole.

Sample Labels - Low Voltage Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Abbreviated alphanumeric name of the frame. LV distribution frames will be named by street address. Address - This is the street number and name of the LV distribution frame. These labels are placed on the MOVING PORTION of the dwarf units. Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the disconnector; this may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the street or lot number and street name of the location of the remote end of the cable to which the disconnector is connected. Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) Name - Name of the fused disconnector; this may be a number which was previously generated from the pole-top switch register. Where this number is the same as the DFIS Pick ID the DFIS Pick ID shall be shown here. Address - This is the street or lot number and street name of the location of the remote end of the cable to which the fused disconnector is connected. These labels are placed on the FIXED PORTION of the dwarf units. Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS)

Acronym - For DFIS equipment type. DFIS Pick ID - Unique identifier generated from the Distribution Facilities Information System (DFIS) 4 of 4

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HORSTMANN ALPHA E FAULT INDICATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Horstmann Alpha E Fault Indicator N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution

Normal

Note: These fault indicators are typically used on metal clad switchgear where the HV cable terminations are not visible. These fault indicators automatically reset in either two (2) or four (4) hours depending on the setting. (F 3, F 7) The fault indicator sensitivity can be set for either 400A, 600A, 800A or 1000A. (F 2, F 6) The required settings are to be selected prior to commissioning of the switchgear.

Fault

Operation Options Fault Indicator Self Resetting Manual Resetting Manual Triggering Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Fault Indication - Automatic Resetting

C6

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Fault current indication is shown by the red semaphores - one (1) per phase - as shown.

The fault indicator will automatically reset in either two (2) or four (4) hours depending on the setting or may be reset remotely by DC.

Operation Resetting / Triggering the Fault Indicator Manually

G3 G7

1. Press the 'Test' button to reset / trigger the fault indicator manually. Note: In some applications these fault indicators can be remotely reset by DC.

1

Special Notes Caution The fault indicator will automatically reset in either two (2) or four (4) hours depending on the setting or may be reset remotely by DC.

1

N/A

Status Indicators

HORSTMANN ALPHA E FAULT INDICATOR

Doc Ref: WPHorstmannAlphaEFI1

Operation Alternate Version of the Alpha E Fault Indicator

Special Notes Caution

1. An alternate version of the Alpha E Fault Indicator (as shown) has different timer and current setting switches. The operation of this version of the fault indicator is the same as the instructions above.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 1

HORSTMANN ALPHA E FAULT INDICATOR

HORSTMANN ALPHA E FAULT INDICATOR Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPHorstmannAlphaEFI2

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HORSTMANN FLUID TYPE FAULT INDICATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Horstmann Fluid Type Fault Indicator N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution Note: These fault indicators are typically used in metal clad switchgear with elbow type HV cable terminations. Note: These fault indicators cannot be reset manually. Automatic resetting takes approximately four (4) hours. Note: These fault indicators typically have two (2) ratings - 400A, 800A.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Latching

Earthing Fault Indicator Self Resetting Manual Resetting Manual Triggering

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Normal Oil Levels

Fault

Normal

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Fault Indication - Normal

B4

Correct Latching

Special Notes Caution

1. Circuit normal indication is shown by the clear liquid as shown.

These fault indicators cannot be reset manually. Automatic resetting takes app. four (4) hours.

1

Operation Fault Indication - Fault

D6

Special Notes Caution

1. Fault current indication is shown by the clear liquid turning red in colour as shown.

These fault indicators cannot be reset manually.

Note: These fault indicators will automatically reset in app. four (4) hours.

Automatic resetting takes app. four (4) hours.

1

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HORSTMANN FLUID TYPE FAULT INDICATOR

Doc Ref: WPHorstmannFluidFI1

1 of 1

HORSTMANN FLUID TYPE FAULT INDICATOR

HORSTMANN FLUID TYPE FAULT INDICATOR Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPHorstmannFluidFI2

This Page Is Deliberately Left Blank

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

HV - LV FUSE RATING TABLES Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Various HV Drop-out, RMU, Fault Tamer, LV HRC Various Various Air / Oil

Voltage KV 330 22 220 11 132 6.6 33 LV

Special Notes Caution There are different types and sizes of fuse element. The correct fuse element must be used to replace the fuse that has been blown. To ensure the correct fuse element is used, an appropriate fuse rating table must be consulted. This will therefore require the size and rating of the protected transformer or the configuration of the protected rural spur to be confirmed before the fuse can be replaced. This ensures appropriate grading is maintained. In emergencies, using the correct fuse element or confirming the network arrangement may not be possible. Where an incorrect size is used, the correct size must be fitted as soon as possible.

The table below shows HV DROP-OUT and LV HRC fuse ratings for single and three phase transformers from 5 KVA to 1000 KVA. HV voltages range from 6.6 KV to 33 KV.

DROP-OUT FUSE ELEMENTS PHASE

SINGLE

6.6 KV

KVA

11 KV

33 KV

LV FUSES

5

2

2

30A HRC

10

3.15

3.15

60A HRC 100A HRC

3.15

3.15

25

5

3.15

3.15

3.15

80A HRC

50/63

10

5

3.15

3.15

100A HRC

100

16

10

5

5

200

31.5

16

10

8

300/315

40

25

16

10

500

63

40

25

16

63

31.5

25

80

40

31.5

20/25

THREE

22 KV

750 100

1000

HV - LV FUSE RATING TABLES

Doc Ref: WPHVLVFuseRatingTable1

NO LV FUSING

The table below shows RING MAIN HRC fuse element ratings (Amps) for THREE PHASE transformers. KVA

6.6 KV

11 KV

22 KV

33 KV

63 / 160 300 / 315

31.5

25

10

6.3

50

31.5

16

16

500

80

40

25

20

630

100

50

31.5

20

750

125

63

40

-

1000

160

80

40

40

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

HV - LV FUSE RATING TABLES

HV - LV FUSE RATING TABLES Date Issued: 4 May 2010

Doc Ref: WPHVLVFuseRatingTable2

The table below shows fuse size ratings for RURAL SPURS. The sizes used in the field may differ from this table, according to regional direction and number of different sized transformers on the spur.

SPUR FUSE SIZE (AMPS)

12.7 KV TRANSFORMERS (NUMBER)

19.1 KV TRANSFORMERS (NUMBER)

3

10

15

5

15

20 35

8

25

10

30

15

45

The table below shows FAULT TAMER fuse element ratings (Amps) for SINGLE PHASE transformers. Transformer kVA

11 KV

22 KV

5

3

3

10

3

3

20 / 25

3

3

The table below shows FAULT TAMER fuse element ratings (Amps) for THREE PHASE transformers. KVA

6.6 KV

11 KV

22 KV

25

3

3

3

50 / 63

5

5

3

100

7

7

3

160

15

10

5

200

20

20

7

20

10

315

33 KV

20

500 630 1000

= The fuse element size is not available in Fault Tamers. Use standard HDO fittings. The table below shows FAULT TAMER fuse element ratings (Amps) for RURAL SPUR protection.

2 of 2

SPUR FUSE SIZE (AMPS)

12.7 KV, 10 KVA TRANSFORMERS (NUMBER)

5

10

5

15

7

25

10

30

15

45

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

KYLE FORM 4C ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Kyle Form 4C Electronic Recloser Control N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution This electronic recloser control is used predominantly with McGraw Edison ACRs. Confirm the relevant ACR is fit for service prior to and after any operation. Remote electrical operation is always the preferred method of operation for this ACR electronic control box. Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control

E6

2,3

1. Open the ACR control cabinet door. 2. Lower the Supervisory ON / OFF toggle switch to the 'SUPERVISORY OFF' position to disable remote control of the ACR. 3. Raise the Supervisory ON / OFF toggle switch to the 'SUPERVISORY ON' position to enable remote control of the ACR. 4. If required close the ACR control cabinet door.

Operation Closing the ACR - Local Electrical

D6 C3

4

3

1. Open the ACR control cabinet door. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. 3. Rotate the ACR control lever CW to the stop position and hold for app. five (5) seconds then release to close the ACR. 4. Confirm the LCD indicators show the recloser as closed. 5. Enable the ACR remote control. 6. Close the ACR control cabinet door.

Operation Opening the ACR - Local Electrical

D6 C3

4

3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Open the ACR control cabinet door. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. 3. Rotate the ACR control lever ACW to the stop position and hold for app. five (5) seconds then release to open the ACR. 4. Confirm the LCD indicators show the recloser as opened. 5. Enable the ACR remote control. 6. Close the ACR control cabinet door. Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation. The auto reclose must be suppressed before closing the ACR after lockout.

KYLE FORM 4C ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPKyleForm4CControl1

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

KYLE FORM 4C ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

KYLE FORM 4C ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPKyleForm4CControl2

Operation

C6

Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose 4 2,3

1. Open the ACR control cabinet door. 2. Raise the Auto Reclose toggle switch to the 'NON RECLOSING' position to disable the ACR auto reclose. 3. Lower the Auto Reclose toggle switch to the 'RECLOSING' position to enable the ACR auto reclose. 4. Confirm the LCD indicators show the correct reclosing status. 5. Close the ACR control cabinet door.

Operation

C6

Disabling / Enabling the ACR Earth Leakage Protection

4 2,3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1. Open the ACR control cabinet door. 2. Raise the Earth Leakage toggle switch to the 'GROUND TRIP BLOCK' position to disable the ACR earth leakage protection. 3. Lower the Earth Leakage toggle switch to the 'GROUND TRIP NORMAL' position to enable the ACR earth leakage protection. 4. Confirm the LCD indicators show the correct ground trip status. Close the ACR control cabinet door.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to any operation. Note: The Reclose/Non Reclose feature can be activated via supervisory signal.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to any operation. Note: The Ground Trip Block / Ground Trip Normal feature can be activated via supervisory signal.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Nulec CAPM2 Electronic Recloser Control N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

CAPM2

This electronic control box is used to control Nulec ACRs. Note: The CAPM2 control panel has a 'COLD LOAD' pad (Main Picture, H 7) instead of the 'PROT GROUP' pad as found on the CAPM5 control panel. The module type is shown on the first display panel. Where CAPM2 modules have been upgraded to CAPM5 the 'PROT GROUP' pad may still be labelled 'COLD LOAD', but functions as PROT GROUP. Remote operation of the circuit recloser is always the preferred method of operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Auto Reclose

O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Activating the Control Box Display

D6 H5

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display - 'OPERATOR SETTINGS' will be displayed.

Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control

D6 F6 G7

2,3 1 4

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. Disabling the ACR Remote Control 2. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad once. 'Remote Control On' will flash on the display. 3. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad again. The display will flash 'Do Not Operate'. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad again. The display will flash 'Local Control On'. 4. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control

D6 G6

5,6

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation. Remote control must be disabled before any local control can be achieved.

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM2Control1

Special Notes Caution

Enabling the ACR Remote Control 5. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad once. 'Local Control On' will flash on the display. 6. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad again. The display will flash 'Remote Control On'. 7. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

7 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1 of 3

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

5

D6 B5

4

1

Operation Closing the ACR - Local Electrical 1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction. 3. Disable the ACR auto Reclose. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose instruction below. 4. Confirm the 'ISOLATE ENABLE' switch is in the 'ENABLE' position as shown. 5. Press the red 'CLOSE' pad to close the ACR. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation

D6 B6

Opening the ACR - Local Electrical

3 1 4

1

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction. 3. Confirm the 'ISOLATE ENABLE' switch is in the 'ENABLE' position as shown. 4. Press the green 'TRIP' pad to open the ACR. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose

D6 F7 G7

3,4 4

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction. Disabling the ACR Auto Reclose 3. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad once. 'Auto Reclose On' will flash on the display. 4. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display will flash 'One Shot To Lockout'. 5. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose

F7 G7

Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose 6. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad once. 'One Shot To Lockout' will flash on the display. 7. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display will flash 'Auto Reclose On'. 8. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

6,7

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

6

D6 H6

3,4 1

2 of 3

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM2Control2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction.

Note: If the ACR has a by-pass switch then the Earth Fault (E/F) & Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection must be disabled prior to any operation.

Disabling the ACR E/F & SEF Protection 3. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad once. 'E/F ON, SEF ON' will flash on the display. 4. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F OFF, SEF OFF'.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

Special Notes Caution Note: 'SEFOFF' will only be displayed if the SEF protection is enabled on the particular unit.

5. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F Off and SEF Off.

5 Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

Note: E/F & SEF protection must be restored separately.

Enabling the ACR E/L & SEF Protection 6. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad once. 'E/F OFF, SEF OFF' will flash on the display. 7. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F ON, SEF OFF'. 8. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F On and SEF Off or...

6,7

Special Notes Caution

8 Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

9

9. ...press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F ON, SEF ON'. 10. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F On and SEF On.

Special Notes Caution Note: E/F & SEF protection must be restored separately. Note: SEF can only be turned on if enabled on the particular unit.

10

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM2Control3

3 of 3

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

NULEC CAPM2 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM2Control4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Nulec CAPM5 Electronic Recloser Control N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

CAPM5

This electronic control box is used to control Nulec ACRs. Note: The CAPM5 control panel has a 'PROT GROUP' pad (Main Picture, H 7) instead of the 'COLD LOAD' pad as found on the CAPM2 control panel. The module type is shown on the first display panel. Where CAPM2 modules have been upgraded to CAPM5 the 'PROT GROUP' pad may still be labelled 'COLD LOAD', but functions as PROT GROUP. Remote operation of the circuit recloser is always the preferred method of operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Auto Reclose

O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Activating the Control Box Display

D6 H5

2

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display - 'TRIP FLAGS' will be displayed. 2. Push the pad. 'OPERATOR SETTINGS' will be displayed.

Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control

F6 G7

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. Disabling the ACR Remote Control 2. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad once. 'Remote Control On' will flash on the display. 3. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad again. The display will flash 'Local Control On'. 4. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

2,3

Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

4 Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control

F6 G7

5,6

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM5Control1

Special Notes Caution

Enabling the ACR Remote Control 5. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad once. 'Local Control On' will flash on the display. 6. Press the 'LOCAL REMOTE' pad again. The display will flash 'Remote Control On'. 7. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

Confirm the ACR location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

7 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

1 of 3

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

5

D6 B5

4

1

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM5Control2

Operation Closing the ACR - Local Electrical 1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction. 3. Disable the ACR auto Reclose. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose instruction below. 4. Confirm the 'ISOLATE ENABLE' switch is in the 'ENABLE' position as shown. 5. Press the red 'CLOSE' pad to close the ACR. 6. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation

D6 B6

Opening the ACR - Local Electrical

3 1 4

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction. 3. Confirm the 'ISOLATE ENABLE' switch is in the 'ENABLE' position as shown. 4. Press the green 'TRIP' pad to open the ACR. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the ACR status.

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose

F7 G7

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction.

1

Disabling the ACR Auto Reclose 3. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad once. 'Auto Reclose ON' will be flash on the display. 4. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display may flash 'Protection OFF'. (refer to Caution note)

3,4

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose

F7 G7

Warning: If 'Protection OFF' is displayed press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display will then flash 'Auto Reclose OFF'. 5. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

6 5 H6 G7

7

Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose 6. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad once. 'Auto Reclose OFF - Single Shot Active' will flash on the display.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution Note: The recloser protection can be inadvertently disabled by this function – read the display to confirm the correct function has been turned off. 'Auto Reclose OFF – Single Shot Active' should be displayed.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the ACR location and labelling prior to operation. Note: If protection is inadvertently turned off Re-Enable by Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose.

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR Auto Reclose

Special Notes Caution

7. Press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display may flash 'Auto Reclose ON'. (refer to Caution note) Warning: If 'Protection OFF' is displayed press the 'AUTO ON/OFF' pad again. The display will then flash 'Auto Reclose ON'. 8. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state.

Note: The recloser protection can be inadvertently disabled by this function – read the display to confirm the correct function has been turned on. 'Auto Reclose ON' should be displayed.

8 2 of 3

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

H6 G7

3,4

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PANEL ON/OFF' pad to activate the display. 2. Disable the ACR remote control. Refer to the Disabling / Enabling the ACR Remote Control instruction.

Note: If the ACR has a by-pass switch then the Earth Fault (E/F) & Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF) protection must be disabled prior to any operation.

Disabling the ACR E/F & SEF Protection 3. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad once. 'E/F ON, SEF ON' will flash on the display. 4. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F OFF, SEF OFF'.

1

Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

Special Notes Caution Note: 'SEFOFF' will only be displayed if the SEF protection is enabled on the particular unit.

5. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F Off and SEF Off.

5 Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

Note: E/F & SEF protection must be restored separately.

Enabling the ACR E/L & SEF Protection 6. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad once. 'E/F OFF, SEF OFF' will flash on the display. 7. Press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F ON, SEF OFF'. 8. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F On and SEF Off or...

6,7

Special Notes Caution

8 Operation Disabling / Enabling the ACR E/F & SEF Prot.

H6 G7

9

9. ...press the 'EARTH PROT' pad again. The display will flash 'E/F ON, SEF ON'. 10. Press the 'ENTER' pad to accept the changed state E/F On and SEF On.

Special Notes Caution Note: E/F & SEF protection must be restored separately. Note: SEF can only be turned on if enabled on the particular unit.

10

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM5Control3

3 of 3

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL

NULEC CAPM5 ELECTRONIC RECLOSER CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPNulecCAPM5Control4

This page is deliberately left blank.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NULEC ELECTRONIC CONTROL BOX OPERATION FLOW CHART Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Nulec Electronic Control Box - Generic N/A N/A N/A

COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS

Only appears when the Loop Automation Scheme is installed and selected.

CAPM4/5 CONTROL BOXES Turn over the page for the CAPM2 Control Box Flow Chart

LOOP AUTOMATION CONFIGURATION IOEX STATUS WSOS PORT 8 COMMUNICATIONS QUICK KEY MAP SELECTION OPTIONS 1 - 2 CAPABILITY

SWITCHGEAR WEAR and GENERAL DETAILS SWITCHGEAR TYPE and RATINGS RADIO and TIME SET SWITCHGEAR TERMINAL DESIGNATION PHASE VOLTAGE and POWER FLOW LIVE/DEAD INDICATION OLDEST

SWITCHGEAR STATUS OPERATOR SETTINGS

MOST RECENT

Only appears when the Loop Automation Scheme is installed and selected.

LOOP AUTOMATION

FLAGS

EVENT LOG

MENU

MENU

EVENT LOG Sequence Of Events MEASUREMENT Display Group

SYSTEMS STATUS Display Group

PANEL ON/OFF

INSTANTANEOUS DEMAND

PROTECTION SETTINGS PAGE 1

MENU POWER SYSTEM VOLTAGES

PROTECTION SETTINGS PAGES 2 - 5

SUPPLY OUTAGES

PAGES 1 - 3

CAPM5 ONLY

FREQUENCY MONTHLY MAXIMUM DEMAND

MONTHLY MAXIMUM HISTORY

PHASE WORK TAG PROTECTION

SELECT MENU

MENU SELECT

PROTECTION PAGES 1 - 2 NUMBER 1 - 4

AVERAGE DEMAND

MENU

Only appears when Directional Blocking is available.

PHASE SINGLE SHOT PROTECTION

DEMAND

SELECT

MENU

PROTECTION Display Group

EARTH PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1 - 4 EARTH SINGLE SHOT PROTECTION

WEEKLY MAXIMUM HISTORY

EARTH WORK TAG PROTECTION

NULEC ELECTRONIC CONTROL BOX OPERATION FLOW CHART

Doc Ref: WPNulecControlFlowChart1

OLDEST

OLDEST

AVERAGE DEMAND HISTORY

SELECT SET SAMPLE PERIOD

MENU

Shaded area options not available on the CAPM5

OLDEST

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NULEC ELECTRONIC CONTROL BOX OPERATION FLOW CHART

NULEC ELECTRONIC CONTROL BOX OPERATION FLOW CHART

2 of 2

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPNulecControlFlowChart2

CAPM2 CONTROL BOX

SYSTEM STATUS 6 OLDEST SYSTEM STATUS 2

EVENT LOG

SYSTEM STATUS 1

MENU

EVENT LOG Sequence Of Events

MENU

MEASUREMENT Display Group

PANEL ON/OFF

INSTANTANEOUS DEMAND

MENU INSTANTANEOUS LINE VOLTAGE

MENU

PROTECTION Display Group PROTECTION SETTINGS PAGE 1

PROTECTION SETTING 2

WEEKLY MAXIMUM DEMAND

PHASE PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1 - 4

AVERAGE DEMAND

SELECT MENU

MENU SELECT

SYSTEMS STATUS Display Group

EARTH PROTECTION TRIP NUMBER 1 - 4

WEEKLY MAXIMUM HISTORY

OLDEST

AVERAGE DEMAND HISTORY

SELECT SET SAMPLE PERIOD

MENU OLDEST

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

SEL 351 PROTECTION RELAY Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 N/A

Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories SEL 351 Protection Relay N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution The SEL 351 is a microprocessor based multifunction relay incorporating overcurrent, earth fault, sensitive earth fault and UFLS elements. It is used in transformer, busbar and feeder protection schemes. Ensure all relay operation LED indications (flags) are recorded before resetting the relay. For alarm and fault relay flag descriptions refer to the: ALARM AND FAULT RELAY FLAGS DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM template in this manual.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Via CB Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Status Indicators

Operation Relay LED Interpretation

SEL 351 PROTECTION RELAY

Doc Ref: WPSEL351Relay1

C4 EN

TRIP

A

INST COMM SOTF

B C G FAULT TYPE

N

50

51

81

RS

CY 79

LO

INTERPRETATION OF SEL 351 LED INDICATORS LED

PHASE LED

MEANING

A

Overcurrent Time Red Phase

1

B

Overcurrent Time White Phase

2

C

Overcurrent Time Blue Phase

3

Earth Fault time

15

A

Overcurrent Instant Red Phase

4

B

Overcurrent Instant White Phase

5

C

Overcurrent Instant Blue Phase

6

Sensitive Earth Fault

14

UFLS

850

EN TRIP

51

Relay Is Enabled

G or N TRIP

50

G or N TRIP

81

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

FLAG NO.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

SEL 351 PROTECTION RELAY

SEL 351 PROTECTION RELAY Date Issued: 9 November 2006

Doc Ref: WPSEL351Relay2

Operation Relay LED Interpretation

INTERPRETATION OF SEL 351 LED INDICATORS LED

MEANING

FLAG NO.

INST

Instantaneous Trip

COM

Communications Assisted Trip (N/A on SEL 351)

STOF

Switch On To Fault

RS

Reset Auto Reclose successful and reclaim timer has expired

CY

Cycle (Auto Reclose in progress)

LO

Lockout Auto Reclose unsuccessful and scheme locked out from further Auto Reclose events

Operation Example LED Interpretations

EN

A

TRIP

INST COMM SOTF

B C G FAULT TYPE

N

50

51

81

EN

RS

CY 79

LO

A

White - Blue Phase Overcurrent Time Trip

EN

A

TRIP

INST COMM SOTF

B C G FAULT TYPE

N

TRIP

INST COMM SOTF

B C G FAULT TYPE

51

81

RS

CY 79

LO

Red - White Phase Instantaneous Trip

50

51

81

EN

RS

CY 79

LO

A

TRIP

INST COMM SOTF

B C G FAULT TYPE

Sensitive Earth Fault Trip

D4

N

50

N

50

51

81

RS

CY 79

LO

UFLS Trip

Operation Resetting Relay LEDs (Flags) 1. Press the TARGET RESET button. The LED's will illuminate for a one second lamp test then all target (flag) LED's are cleared, with the exception of the LED EN

Special Notes Caution Pressing the TARGET RESET clears trips if the trip condition has gone away. It also clears automatic diagnostic messages from the front panel LCD display.

1

2 of 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

GE VR-1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Voltage KV 330 33 220 22 132 11 66 6.6

GE VR-1 Voltage Regulator Control N/A N/A N/A

Special Notes Caution Confirm the regulators, by-pass air break switch and HV links are fit for service prior to and after any operation. Note: Each regulator unit has its own control box. Note: Each regulator unit may be on a different tap. When returning the units to the neutral tap position (0) firstly match regulator taps then shift to the neutral tap '0'. Try to limit the tap difference between regulators to one tap position during this process. Warning: Ensure the regulators are on the neutral tap - tap position '0' - prior to operating the by-pass air break switch.

Operation Options By-pass Air Break Switch - Open / Close Tap Changing - Local Electrical HV Links - Open / Close Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm C5

5

4

7

Labeling

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the tap positions on all three regulator units. ON EACH REGULATOR UNIT 2. Open the regulator control unit access door. 3. Place the 'SCADA' toggle switch in the 'LOCAL' position. 4. Place the 'AUTO / MANUAL' toggle switch in the 'MANUAL' position. 5. Raise / lower taps using the 'RAISE / LOWER' toggle switch.

Note: The neutral tap position for these regulator units is tap position '0'.

Operation Adjusting the Regulator to the Neutral Tap

Special Notes Caution

6. The 'Neutral Light' indicator LED should illuminate when the regulator is on the neutral tap '0'. 7. Confirm the correct neutral tap position '0' on the mechanical tap position indicator as shown.

Confirm the mechanical tap position indicator points to the neutral tap position '0' on each regulator unit.

If the neutral tap position '0' cannot be confirmed by the two methods described above then do not proceed any further.

6

C5

Gas Pressure

Operation Adjusting the Regulator to the Neutral Tap

3

C8

Oil Levels

GE VR-1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL

Doc Ref: WPGEVR1RegControl1

1

3 2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Closing the Regulators By-pass Air Break Switch

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm each regulator unit is on the neutral tap '0' then immediately place the 'AUTO / MANUAL' toggle switch on each regulator unit in the 'OFF' position. 2. On each regulator unit place the 'VOLTAGE SOURCE' toggle switch in the 'OFF' position as shown. 3. On each regulator unit place the 'SCADA' toggle switch in the 'LOCAL' position as shown. 4. Close the by-pass air break switch. Refer to the relevant AIR BREAK SWITCH template in this manual if required.

Warning: Confirm each regulator unit is on the neutral tap '0' prior to closing the by-pass air break switch. The 'AUTO / MANUAL' and 'VOLTAGE SOURCE' toggle switches must be switched to 'OFF' immediately after confirming the neutral tap positions.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

GE VR-1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL

GE VR-1 VOLTAGE REGULATOR CONTROL Date Issued: 17 February 2009

Doc Ref: WPGEVR1RegControl2

Operation Isolating the Regulators

C5 2 3 5 4 2

1. Confirm the regulator units by-pass air break switch is closed. 2. Confirm all the regulator units are on the neutral tap '0'. 3. On each regulator unit confirm the 'AUTO / MANUAL' toggle switch is in the 'OFF' position. 4. On each regulator unit confirm the 'VOLTAGE SOURCE' toggle switch is in the 'OFF' position. 5. On each regulator unit confirm the 'SCADA' toggle switch is in the 'LOCAL' position.

Confirm each regulator unit is on the neutral tap '0' prior to opening any HV links.

1

Operation Isolating the Regulators

N/A

6. Open the Source (S) HV links in the sequence 7. Open the Load (L) HV links in the sequence

Load

Source

C5

8. Open the Source Load (SL) HV links in the sequence

Operation Placing the Regulators Into Service

3

2 5 4

1. Confirm the regulator units by-pass air break switch is closed. 2. Confirm all the regulator units are on the neutral tap '0'. 3. On each regulator unit confirm the 'AUTO / MANUAL' toggle switch is in the 'OFF' position. 4. On each regulator unit confirm the 'VOLTAGE SOURCE' toggle switch is in the 'OFF' position. 5. On each regulator unit confirm the 'SCADA' toggle switch is in the 'LOCAL' position.

Special Notes Caution Identify each regulator unit HV link via the name plate i.e. - prior to any ti operation. Open the HV links with a firm, smart action to limit energisation current arcing.

Special Notes Caution Confirm each regulator unit is on the neutral tap '0' prior to closing any HV links.

1

Operation Placing the Regulators Into Service

G2

6. Close the Source Load (SL) disconnect HV links in the sequence 7. Close the Source (S) disconnect HV links in the sequence Load

C5

Source

10

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Special Notes Caution Identify each regulator unit HV link via the name plate i.e. - prior to any ti operation.

8. Close the Load (L) disconnect HV links in the sequence

Operation Placing the Regulators Into Service

11

12

2 of 2

Special Notes Caution

Special Notes Caution

9. Open the by-pass air break switch. Refer to the relevant AIR BREAK SWITCH template in this manual if required. 10. On each regulator unit place the 'VOLTAGE SOURCE' toggle switch in the 'INT' position. 11. On each regulator unit place the 'AUTO / MANUAL' toggle switch is in the 'AUTO' position. 12. On each regulator unit place the 'SCADA' toggle switch in the 'REMOTE' position. 13. Close the regulator control unit access doors.

Confirm the regulator units are functioning correctly after placing into service. This may require changing taps manually. If required refer to the Adjusting the Regulator to the Neutral Tap instructions on page

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

ABB SLBM / BSL 3 PHASE GANG ISOLATOR Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating:

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Voltage

ABB SLBM / BSL 3 Phase Gang Isolator SLBM 400A, 630A. BSL 1600 - 3000A BSL - Not to be used to break load SLBM - Normal load current

Special Notes Caution

SLBM

Low Voltage

BSL

BSL Blanking Plate

Warning: The ABB BSL 3 phase gang isolator is not to be operated to make or break load. Exercise care when opening / closing as the hinge fittings can be fragile. Open and close the 3 phase gang isolators in a firm and positive manner. Though different in appearance the operating principles for the SLBM and BSL versions of these 3 phase gang isolators remain the same.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose LV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening the 3 Phase Gang Isolator

B1

Special Notes Caution

1. Grasp the operating handle of the 3 phase gang isolator as shown. 2. Pull the 3 phase gang isolator open app. 45 degrees in a firm and positive manner.

2

Status Indicators

Confirm the 3 phase gang isolator location and labeling prior to operation. Open the 3 phase gang isolator in a vertical plane. Twisting when opening may damage the lower hinge fitting.

Operation Opening the 3 Phase Gang Isolator

B1

Special Notes Caution

3. Carefully lower the 3 phase gang isolator to the horizontal position as shown

3

B8 1

1

Open the 3 phase gang isolator in a vertical plane. Twisting when opening may damage the lower hinge fitting.

Operation Removing / Replacing the 3 Phase Gang Isolator Removing 1. Lift the 3 phase gang isolator clear of the lower fixed hinge as shown. Replacing 1. Carefully place the 3 phase gang isolator hinge arms into the lower fixed hinge fitting. Ensure both hinge arms seat home correctly.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

ABB SLBM / BSL 3 PHASE GANG ISOLATOR

Doc Ref: WPABBSLBM1

Special Notes Caution When replacing the 3 phase gang isolator ensure both the hinge arms seat correctly into the lower fixed hinge fitting or damage may result when closing.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

ABB SLBM / BSL 3 PHASE GANG ISOLATOR

ABB SLBM / BSL 3 PHASE GANG ISOLATOR

2 of 2

Date Issued: 27 August 2007

Doc Ref: WPABBSLBM2

Operation Inserting the BSL Blanking Plate

H8

1

1. Remove the blanking plate from the storage lugs. 2. Place the blanking plate hinge arms into the lower fixed hinge fitting. Ensure both hinge arms seat home correctly.

Special Notes Caution When inserting the blanking plate ensure both the hinge arms seat correctly into the lower fixed hinge fitting or damage may result when closing.

2

Operation Inserting the BSL Blanking Plate

G1 3

3. Carefully raise the blanking plate to the stop position as shown. To remove the blanking plate reverse the above instruction.

Operation Closing the 3 Phase Gang Isolator

B1

1. Confirm the correct size LV fuses have been inserted into the 3 phase gang isolator. 2. Carefully raise the 3 phase gang isolator app. 45 degrees to the position as shown.

Special Notes Caution Raise the blanking plate in a vertical plane. Twisting may damage the lower hinge fitting.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the 3 phase gang isolator location and labeling prior to operation. Raise the 3 phase gang isolator in a vertical plane. Twisting may damage the lower hinge fitting.

2

B1 4

Operation Closing the 3 Phase Gang Isolator 3. Grasp the operating handle of the 3 phase gang isolator as shown. 4. Push the 3 phase gang isolator closed in a firm and positive manner.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Special Notes Caution Close the 3 phase gang isolator in a firm and positive manner.

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN AB5 / 200 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage

Nilsen AB5 / 200 LV Circuit Breaker 2000 Amps Fault - 44KA Air

Low Voltage

Special Notes Caution confirm the LV circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm

Oil Levels

Gas Pressure

Labeling

Operation Opening the Circuit Breaker - Push Button

G3 H8

Status Indicators

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the 'PUSH TO TRIP' button to open the LV circuit breaker. 2. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the LV circuit breaker status.

Confirm the LV circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

1

Operation Opening / Closing the Circuit Breaker - Handle

G4

1. Open the LV circuit breaker control mechanism access door.

Special Notes Caution

NILSEN AB5 / 200 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAB52001

Confirm the LV circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

1

C7

4 3

2

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Operation Opening / Closing the Circuit Breaker - Handle

Special Notes Caution

2. Insert the operating handle into the operating mechanism as shown. 3. Lower the operating handle to the stop position to open the LV circuit breaker. 4. Raise the operating handle to the stop position to close the LV circuit breaker. 5. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the LV circuit breaker status. 6. Close the control mechanism access door.

Confirm the LV circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NILSEN AB5 / 200 CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN AB5 / 200 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Doc Ref: WPNilsenAB52002

Operation

B5 E5

Racking Out / In the LV Circuit Breaker 4

4

1. 2. 3. 4.

Confirm the LV circuit breaker is open. Open the LV circuit breaker cabinet door. Pull out the two (2) racking handles as shown. Raise the two (2) racking handles simultaneously to the stop position. 5. Withdraw the LV circuit breaker to the stop position.

Special Notes Caution Confirm the LV circuit breaker is open prior to racking out or in.

Note: To rack in the LV circuit breaker reverse the above instructions.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

NILSEN NAB1 / 20 CIRCUIT BREAKER Manufacturer: Model: Rating: Break Rating: Insulant:

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

Voltage

Nilsen NAB1 / 20 LV Circuit Breaker 1800 Amps Fault - 50KA Air

Low Voltage

Special Notes Caution Confirm the LV circuit breaker is fit for service prior to and after operation.

Operation Options Opening Closing Isolation Racking Spring Charge

Earthing Auto Reclose HV Fuses O/C Protection E/F Protection

Prior To Any Local Operation Check / Confirm F4 C7

1

2

Gas Pressure

Labeling

1

Special Notes Caution

1. Withdraw the operating spring charge handle. 2. Lower the spring charge handle to the stop position then raise to the stop position to charge the operating spring. 3. Push the operating spring charge handle back in to the stop position. 4. Confirm the operating spring has charged correctly via the mechanical indicator - C 7 Main Picture.

Confirm the LV circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Special Notes Caution

1. Press the green 'CLOSE' button to close the LV circuit breaker. 2. Press the red 'OPEN' button to open the LV circuit breaker. 3. Confirm the mechanical indicator agrees with the LV circuit breaker status.

2

2

Status Indicators

Operation Charging the Circuit Breaker Operating Spring

Operation Closing / Opening the Circuit Breaker

C3 C5

C7

Oil Levels

Confirm the LV circuit breaker location and labeling prior to operation.

Operation Racking Out / In the LV Circuit Breaker

NILSEN NAB1 / 20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

Doc Ref: WPNilsenNAB1201

Special Notes Caution

1. Confirm the LV circuit breaker is open. 2. Unscrew the two (2) LV circuit breaker cabinet retaining bolts as shown. 3. Open the LV circuit breaker cabinet door.

Confirm the LV circuit breaker is open prior to racking out / in.

2 Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.

1 of 2

NILSEN NAB1 / 20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

NILSEN NAB1 / 20 CIRCUIT BREAKER

2 of 2

Date Issued: 2 March 2006

C4 H2

5

Doc Ref: WPNilsenNAB1202

4,7

6

Operation Racking Out / In the LV Circuit Breaker 4. Unlock if required and slide the racking mechanism interlock across to the right. 5. Insert the racking handle into the racking mechanism. 6. Rotate the racking handle ACW until the circuit breaker reaches the stop position. Remove the racking handle. 7. Slide the racking mechanism interlock across to the left and lock if required.

Special Notes Caution Note: Ensure the mechanical indicator displays 'SERVICE' at the completion of the racking in process.

Note: To rack in the LV circuit breaker reverse the above instructions.

Document Number PSC/80/3(78)V1

Network Switchgear Instruction Manual

Design © Artefact Systems Pty Ltd.